T3904-390-02 SG-Ins Lec EN PDF

Advanced Assembly Design using Creo Parametric 2.
PT
In
te rn
al Fo r
T3904-390-02
Authored and published using
U se
nl y
Copyright 2012 Parametric Technology Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Copyright for PTC software products is with Parametric Technology Corporation, its subsidiary companies (collectively PTC), and their respective licensors. This software is provided under written license agreement, contains valuable trade secrets and proprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries. It may not be copied or distributed in any form or medium, disclosed to third parties, or used in any manner not provided for in the software licenses agreement except with written prior approval from PTC. UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVIL DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION. User and training guides and related documentation from PTC is subject to the copyright laws of the United States and other countries and is provided under a license agreement that restricts copying, disclosure, and use of such documentation. PTC hereby grants to the licensed software user the right to make copies in printed form of this documentation if provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use and in accordance with the license agreement under which the applicable software is licensed. Any copy made shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary notice provided by PTC. Training materials may not be copied without the express written consent of PTC. This documentation may not be disclosed, transferred, modified, or reduced to any form, including electronic media, or transmitted or made publicly available by any means without the prior written consent of PTC and no authorization is granted to make copies for such purposes. Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a warranty or commitment by PTC. PTC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document. For Important Copyright, Trademark, Patent and Licensing Information see backside of this guide.
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
About PTC University

Welcome to PTC University!
With an unmatched depth and breadth of product development knowledge, PTC University helps you realize the most value from PTC products. Only PTC University offers: An innovative learning methodology PTCs Precision Learning Methodology is a proven proprietary approach used by PTC to develop and deliver learning solutions. Flexible Delivery Options PTC University ensures you receive the same quality training programs regardless of the learning style. Our extensive experience, innovative learning techniques, and targeted learning modules facilitate the rapid retention of concepts, and higher user productivity. Premier Content and Expertise A thorough instructor certification process and direct access to the PTC product development and PTC consulting organizations means that only PTC courses can give you highly-qualified instructors, the most up-to-date product information and best practices derived from thousands of deployments. Global Focus PTC University delivers training where and when you need it by providing over 100 training centers located across 35 countries offering content in nine languages. Delivering Value A role-based learning design ensures the right people have the right tools to do their jobs productively while supporting the organizations overall performance goals. The course you are about to take will expose you to a number of learning offerings that PTC University has available. These include: Instructor-led Training (ILT) The ideal blend of classroom lectures, personal demonstrations, hands-on workshops, assessments, and post-classroom tools. Pro/FICIENCY This Web-based, skills assessment and development-planning tool will help improve your skills and productivity. eLearning Libraries 24/7 access to Web-based training that will compliment your instructor-led course. Precision LMS A powerful learning management system that will manage your eLearning Library and Pro/FICIENCY assessments.
Fo r
PTC University additionally offers Precision Learning Programs. These are corporate learning programs designed to your organizations specific goals, current skills, desired competencies, and training preferences. Whatever your learning needs are, PTC University can help you get the most out of your PTC products.
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
PTC Telephone and Fax Numbers

North America
Education Services Registration Tel: (888) 782-3773 Fax: (781) 370-5307 Technical Support (Monday - Friday) Tel: (800) 477-6435 Fax: (781) 707-0328 License Management and Contracts Tel: 877-ASK-4-PTC (877-275-4782) Fax: (781) 707-0331
Technical Support, License Management, Training & Consulting Tel: +800-PTC-4-HELP (00-800-78-24-43-57)
Asia
Fo r
PT
In addition, you can access the PTC Web site at www.ptc.com. Our Web site contains the latest training schedules, registration information, directions to training facilities, and course descriptions. You can also reach technical support, and register for online service options such as knowledge base searches, reference libraries, and documentation. You can also find general information about PTC, PTC Products, Consulting Services, Customer Support, and PTC Partners.
In
te rn
Please refer to http://www.ptc.com/services/training/contact.htm for contact information.
al
U se
Europe
nl y
Precision Learning
Precision Learning in the Classroom
PTC University uses the Precision Learning methodology to develop effective, comprehensive class material that will improve the productivity of both individuals and organizations. PTC then teaches using the proven instructional design principal of Tell Me, Show Me, Let Me Do: Topics are introduced through a short presentation, highlighting the key concepts. These key concepts are then reinforced by seeing them applied in the software application. You then apply the concepts through structured exercises. After the course, a Pro/FICIENCY assessment is provided to enable you to assess your understanding of the materials. The assessment results will also identify the class topics that require further review. At the end of the class, you will either take a Pro/FICIENCY assessment via your PTC University eLearning account, or your instructor will provide training on how to do this after the class.
Each student that enrolls in a PTC class has a PTC University eLearning account. This account will be automatically created if you do not already have one. As part of the class, you receive additional content in your account: A Pro/FICIENCY assessment from the course content that generates a Recommended Learning Report based on your results. A Web-based training version of the course, based on the same instructional approach of lecture, demonstration, and exercise. The Recommended Learning Report will link directly to sections of this training that you may want to review. Please note that Web-based training may not be available in all languages. The Web-based training is available in your account for one year after the live class.
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
Precision Learning After the Class
al
U se
nl y
Precision Learning Recommendations

PTC uses a role-based training approach. The roles and the associated training are graphically displayed in a curriculum map. Curriculum maps are available for numerous PTC products and versions in the training section of our Web site at http://www.ptc.com/services/edserv/learning/paths/index.htm.
Fo r
Please note that a localized map may not be available in every language and that the map above is partial and for illustration purposes only. Before the end of the class, your instructor will review the map corresponding to the course you are taking. This review, along with instructor recommendations, should give you some ideas for additional training that corresponds to your role and job functions.
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Training Agenda
Day 1
Module 01 Module 02 Module 03 Module 04 Using Advanced Assembly Constraints Creating and Using Component Interfaces Creating and Using Flexible Components Restructuring and Mirroring Assemblies
Day 2
Module 05 Module 06 Module 07 Module 08 Using Assembly Features and Shrinkwrap Replacing Components in an Assembly Understanding the Basics of Simplified Reps Creating Cross-Sections, Display Styles, Layer States, and Combined Views
Day 3
Module 09 Module 10 Module 11 Module 12
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
Substituting Components using User Defined, Envelopes, and Simplified Reps Understanding Advanced Simplified Rep Functionality Creating and Using Assembly Structure and Skeletons Project
al
U se
nl y
Fo r C In te rn al U se O nl y
PT
Table of Contents Advanced Assembly Design using Creo Parametric 2.0

Using Advanced Assembly Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Constraining Components using Fix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Constraining Two Coordinate Systems using Coincident . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Constraining a Point on a Line using Coincident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Constraining a Point on a Surface using Coincident . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Constraining an Edge on a Surface using Coincident . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Constraining a Point on a Point using Coincident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Creating a Tangent Constraint using Auto Constrain . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Configuring Constraint Sets with Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 Creating and Using Component Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Understanding Component Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Using a Placing Component Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Using a Receiving Component Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Creating a Component Interface using the Save as Interface Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Auto Placing Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Copying and Pasting Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Repeating Component Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Creating and Using Flexible Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Adding Flexibility to a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Placing Flexible Components in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Adding Flexibility to Already Placed Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Using Flexible Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Restructuring and Mirroring Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Restructuring and Reordering Assembly Components . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Creating Mirrored Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Creating Mirrored Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Creating Mirrored Sub-Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Using Assembly Features and Shrinkwrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Understanding Assembly Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Understanding Assembly Feature Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Creating an Assembly Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Creating Assembly Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Creating a Shrinkwrap Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Creating a Shrinkwrap Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Summarizing Shrinkwrap Features and Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 Replacing Components in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Understanding Component Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Replacing Components using Family Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Replacing Components using Reference Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Replacing Components using By Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 Replacing Unrelated Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Understanding Interchange Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 Replacing using a Functional Interchange Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20 Understanding the Basics of Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Retrieving Assembly Subsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Understanding Standard Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Understanding Custom Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Lightweight Graphics Representations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Using Graphics Simplified Reps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Using Geometry Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 Excluding Components using Simplified Reps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24 Defining Simplified Reps Using the Component Chooser . . . . . . . . 7-27 Creating a Default Envelope Simplified Rep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 Creating Part Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37 Opening Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42 Creating Cross-Sections, Display Styles, Layer States, and Combined Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Understanding Assembly Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Creating Assembly Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Creating Offset Assembly Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 Creating Zone Assembly Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Creating Display Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 Creating Layer States in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25 Creating Combination Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Fo r
Substituting Components using User Defined, Envelopes, and Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Understanding Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Creating and using a Surface Subset Shrinkwrap Envelope . . . . . . . 9-5 Creating and Using a Faceted Shrinkwrap Envelope . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Creating and Using an All Solid Surfaces Shrinkwrap Envelope . . . 9-17 Creating and Using a Create Features Envelope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Creating and Using an Envelope Copied from an Existing Part. . . . 9-28 Substituting Components using User Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33 Substituting by Interchange and Family Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Understanding Advanced Simplified Rep Functionality . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Searching for Components for Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Creating Simplified Reps by Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Creating Simplified Reps using Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Simplified Reps by Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Simplified Reps using Exterior Components . . . . . . . . . . Defining Simplified Reps using Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using On-Demand Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating External Simplified Reps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-12 10-17 10-20 10-23 10-29 10-34
Fo r
PT
Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Table Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Skeleton Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Shaft and Arm Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components to Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing the Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
te rn
Creating and Using Assembly Structure and Skeletons . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Understanding Skeletons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 Creating an Assembly Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 Creating Skeletons for Space Claims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 Creating Skeletons for Placement References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 Copying a Model to a Skeleton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17 Creating Multiple Skeletons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18 Sharing Skeleton Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22 Creating and Placing Models using Skeleton References . . . . . . . 11-26 Creating a Motion Skeleton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-32 Sketching a Motion Skeleton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-34 Creating Bodies for a Motion Skeleton. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-38 Assigning Connections for a Motion Skeleton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-41 Creating Solid Models from a Motion Skeleton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-46
al
U se
nl y
12-1 12-2 12-3 12-4 12-5 12-6
In
PT
Student Preface Using the Header
Course Handbook Layout: Modules Topics Concept Theory Procedure Exercise (if applicable) Procedure / Exercise Header:
Fo r
Course Handbook Layout

The information in this course handbook is organized to help students locate information after the course is complete. Each course is organized into modules, each covering a general subject. Each module contains topics, with each topic focused on a specific portion of the module subject. Each individual topic in the module is divided into the following sections: Concept This section contains the initial introduction to the topic and is presented during the class lecture as an overhead slide, typically with figures and bullets.
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
In this topic, you learn about the course handbook layout and the header used to begin each lab in Creo Parametric.
Procedure / Exercise Header
The following items are indicated in the figure above, where applicable: 1. Procedure/Exercise Name This is the name of the lab. 2. Scenario This briefly describes what will be done in the lab. The Scenario is only found in Exercises. 3. Close Windows/Erase Not Displayed A reminder that you should close any open files and erase them from memory:
Fo r
4.
5.
and then click OK. Click Erase Not Displayed Folder Name This is the working directory for the lab. Lab files are stored in topic folders within specific functional area folders. The path to the lab files is: PTCU\CreoParametric2\functional_area_folder\topic_folder In the example, Round is the functional area folder and Variable is the topic folder, so you would set the Working Directory to PTCU\CreoParametric2\Round\Variable. To set the working directory, right-click the folder in the folder tree or browser, and select Set Working Directory. Model to Open This is the file to be opened from the working directory. In the above example, VARIABLE_RAD.PRT is the model to open. The model could be a part, drawing, assembly, and so on. If you are expected to begin the lab without an open model, and instead create a new model, you will see Create New. To open the indicated model, right-click the file in the browser and select Open.
PT
Click Close
In
until the icon is no longer displayed.
te rn
al
To make the exercises and procedures (referred to collectively as labs) as concise as possible, each begins with a header. The header lists the name of the lab, the working directory, and the file you are to open.
U se
The first module for certain courses is known as a process module. Process modules introduce you to the generic high-level processes that will be taught over the span of the entire course.
nl y
Theory This section provides detailed information about content introduced in the Concept, and is discussed in the class lecture but not shown on the overhead slide. The Theory section contains additional paragraphs of text, bullets, tables, and/or figures. Procedure This section provides step-by-step instructions about how to complete the topic within Creo Parametric. Procedures are short, focused, and cover a specific topic. Procedures are found in the Student Handbook only. Not every topic has a Procedure, as there are knowledge topics that contain only Concept and Theory. Exercise Exercises are similar to procedures, except that they are typically longer, more involved, and use more complicated models. Exercises also may cover multiple topics, so not every topic will have an associated exercise. Exercises are found in the separate Exercise Guide and/or the online exercise HTML files.
6. 7.
Task Name Labs are broken into distinct tasks. There may be one or more tasks within a lab. Lab Steps These are the individual steps required to complete a task.
Two other items to note for labs: Saving Saving your work after completing a lab is optional, unless otherwise stated. Exercises Exercises follow the same header format as Procedures.
Setting Up Creo Parametric for Use with Training Labs

Before you begin a lab from any training course, it is important that you configure Creo Parametric to ensure the system is set up to run the lab exercises properly. Therefore, if you are running the training labs on a computer outside of a training center, follow these three basic steps: Extract the class files zip file to a root level drive such as C: or D:. The extracted zip will create the default folder path automatically, such as C:\PTCU\CreoParametric2\. Locate your existing Creo Parametric shortcut. Copy and paste the shortcut to your desktop. Right-click the newly pasted shortcut and select Properties. Select the Shortcut tab and set the Start In location to be the same as the default folder. For example, C:\PTCU\CreoParametric2\. Start Creo Parametric using the newly configured shortcut. The default working directory will be set to the CreoParametric2 folder. You can then navigate easily to the functional area and topic folders.
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Student Preface Using the Header

In this exercise, you learn how to use the header to set up the Creo Parametric working environment for each lab in the course. Close Window Erase Not Displayed EXTRUDE_1.PRT
SampleFunctionalArea\Topic1_Folder Step 1:
Configure Creo Parametric to ensure the system is set up to run the lab exercises properly.
Step 2:
Fo r
1. If you currently have files open, click Close toolbar, until the icon no longer displays.
PT
Close all open windows and erase all objects from memory to avoid any possible conflicts. from the Quick Access
2. Click Erase Not Displayed from the Data group in the ribbon. Click OK if the Erase Not Displayed dialog box appears.
In
3. Start Creo Parametric using the newly configured shortcut. The default working directory is set to the CreoParametric2 folder. You can then navigate easily to the functional area and topic folders.
te rn
2. Locate your existing Creo Parametric shortcut. Copy and paste the shortcut to your desktop. Right-click the newly pasted shortcut and select Properties. Select the Shortcut tab and set the Start In location to be PTCU\CreoParametric2.
al
U se
1. Extract the zipped class files to a root level drive such as C: or D:. The extracted ZIP will create the default folder path automatically, such as C:\PTCU\CreoParametric2.
Perform this task only if you are running the labs on a computer outside of a training center, otherwise proceed to Task 2.
nl y
Step 3:
Browse to and expand the functional area folder for this procedure and set the folder indicated in the header as the Creo Parametric working directory.
1. Notice the SampleFunctionalArea\Topic1_Folder as indicated in the header above. 2. If necessary, select the Folder Browser navigator. tab from the
Fo r
PT
3. Click Working Directory to view the current working directory folder in the browser. Double-click SampleFunctionalArea.
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
4. Right-click the Topic1_Folder folder and select Set Working Directory. 5. Click Working Directory from the Common Folders section to display the contents of the new working directory in the browser.
Fo r
2. You are now ready to begin the first task in the lab: Read the first task. Perform the first step, which in most cases will be to set the initial datum display for the procedure or exercise. Perform the remaining steps in the procedure or exercise.
Step 5:
1. The instruction for setting the datum display indicates which Datum Display types to enable and disable. For example, Enable only the following Datum Display types: . 2. To set the datum display, first click the Datum Display drop-down menu from the In Graphics tool bar.
PT
Set the initial datum display options.
In
1. Notice the lab model EXTRUDE_1.PRT is specified in the header above. Double-click extrude_1.prt in the browser to open it.
te rn
Step 4:
Open the file for this procedure.
al
Alternatively you can use the cascading folder path in the browser to navigate to the topic folder, and then right-click and select Set Working Directory from the browser.
U se
nl y
3. Next, enable and disable the check boxes as necessary. For example you could disable the Select All check box, and then enable only the desired datum types.
4. The model should now appear as shown.
This completes the procedure.
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
PT
Module
1
U se O te rn al
Module 1 | Page 1
Using Advanced Assembly Constraints

Module Overview
You can properly position most components in an assembly using the Automatic Assembly option or by specifically applying basic constraint types such as Mate, Align, or Insert. In some situations however, these basic constraints do not work or are not efficient to use. In these more complex or unique situations, it is helpful to apply more advanced constraints to position components in your assembly. In this module, you will learn how to use Creo Parametric's advanced assembly constraints for positioning components in an assembly.
After completing this module, you will be able to: Assemble a component using the Fix constraint. Use Coincident to constrain components using the two coordinate systems. Use Coincident to constrain components using a point on a line. Use Coincident to constrain components using a point on a surface. Use Coincident to constrain components using an edge on a surface. Use Coincident to constrain components using a point on a point. Use auto constrain to constrain components using a tangency. Configure constraint sets with parameters.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
Objectives
nl y
Constraining Components using Fix

The Fix constraint enables you to maintain a component's position even when it has not been fully constrained.
Figure 1 Packaged Control Arm
In
Constraining Components using Fix

Use the Fix constraint to maintain the current position of a component that has not been fully constrained. This is helpful in cases where a component is partially constrained but the final degree of freedom is not explicitly defined. In the figure shown, the ball end of the control arm is mated to the bottom of the housing socket but the final orientation is not defined. After moving the control arm to a random position, you can apply the Fix constraint to lock that position.
Fo r
Common Uses for the Fix Constraint

You can use the Fix constraint when you have intentionally assembled a component into position without fully constraining that position. The Fix constraint locks the component into the current position so that it does not move while you are working with other components in the design.
Module 1 | Page 2
PT
Figure 3 Fixed Control Arm
te rn
Figure 4 Packaged Symbol Removed
al
2012 PTC
U se
Figure 2 Packaged Symbol in Model Tree
nl y
PROCEDURE - Constraining Components using Fix

Close Window Assembly\Fix Task 1: Erase Not Displayed PIVOT_CONTROL_FIX.ASM
Position the PIVOT_ARM.PRT and lock it in place using the Fix constraint.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the model tree, notice the Packaged Component icon next to PIVOT_ARM.PRT. This icon indicates that the component is packaged or partially constrained. 3. Edit the definition of PIVOT_ARM.PRT. Notice in the dashboard that the constraint STATUS is also shown as Partially Constrained. 4. Press CTRL+ALT and middle-click to move the component in its remaining degrees of freedom. You can move the component to any position.
Fo r
6. In the dashboard, select Fix from the drop-down list. 7. Notice that the constraint STATUS is now Fully Constrained. 8. Click Complete Component .
2012 PTC
PT
5. After positioning the component, right-click and select New Constraint in the graphics window.
You can also apply the Fix constraint to your model by right-clicking in the graphics window. The Fix option is located just below the New constraint in the pop-up menu.
In
te rn
al
Module 1 | Page 3
U se
nl y
Constraining Two Coordinate Systems using Coincident

The Coincident constraint enables you to position a component in an assembly by aligning coordinate systems.
Figure 1 The Coord Sys Constraint
Constraining Two Coordinate Systems using Coincident
Fo r
You may use the Coincident constraint to position a component in an assembly by aligning its coordinate system with a coordinate system in the assembly. You position the component by aligning any corresponding axes of the selected coordinate systems. Because each of the three coordinate system axes are aligned, only one coordinate system on each part or assembly is required to fully constrain a component. During the assembly process, you can select coordinate systems in one of the following four ways: From the graphics window. From the model tree. Using the Search tool. Creating them on-the-fly.
Module 1 | Page 4
PT
Figure 2 Select Two Coordinate Systems
In
te rn
Figure 3 Coordinate Systems Axes are Aligned
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Common Uses for the Coincident Constraint Using Two Coordinate Systems
You can use the Coincident constraint on two coordinate systems in a variety of situations, some of which are as follows: In an assembly created using top-down design techniques, component position is often defined using coordinate systems prior to completion of component designs. In some industries, it is common to create designs using a single common coordinate system. You can use coordinate systems to position components in the design's common coordinate system. When you position components in complicated orientations defined by multiple offsets, angles, and cylindrical or spherical coordinate positions.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 1 | Page 5
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Constraining Two Coordinate Systems using Coincident

Close Window Erase Not Displayed PIVOT_CONTROL.ASM
Assembly\Coordinate_Systems Task 1:
Position the PIVOT_ARM.PRT using a Coord Sys constraint. .
2. Edit the definition of PIVOT_ARM.PRT. Notice the constraint STATUS is No Constraints. 3. In the dashboard, select from the Coincident drop-down list. 4. Select both coordinate systems named ARM_ASSY_REF.
5. Notice that the component snaps to its new location and the constraint STATUS is now Fully Constrained. 6. Click Complete Component
In
Fo r
Module 1 | Page 6
PT
Because a coordinate system defines orientation in the X, Y, and Z directions, only one coordinate system Coincident constraint is required to fully define a component's position.
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types:
Task 2:
Change the orientation of the PIVOT_ARM.PRT.
1. In the model tree, click Settings > Tree Filters.... 2. Under Display, select the Features, Placement folder and Annotations check boxes. 3. Click OK. 4. In the model tree, right-click the coordinate system ARM_ASSY_REF and select Edit. 5. Double-click the 25 degree X value. Edit the value to 25 and press ENTER. 6. Click Regenerate Operations group. from the
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 1 | Page 7
U se
nl y
Constraining a Point on a Line using Coincident

The point on line constraint enables you to position a component by fixing a point or vertex onto an edge, axis, or datum curve.
Figure 1 Select Vertex and Curve
Constraining a Point on a Line using Coincident
Fo r
Coincident can be used to constrain a point on a line or a point or vertex to an edge, axis, or datum curve. In the figure, the vertex at the end of the push pin is constrained to the curve in the slider model. As the slider moves, the push pin follows the curve.
Coincident Constraint Common Uses for a Point on Line

Coincident is used on a point on line constraint in a variety of situations, some of which are as follows: To position a contact location between a point and a path, defined by a curve or edge. To constrain a component vertex onto a model edge. To assemble a component to framework or skeleton geometry.
Module 1 | Page 8
PT
Figure 2 Point on Edge Constraint
In
te rn
Figure 3 Vertex on Curve Position
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Constraining a Point on a Line using Coincident

Close Window Erase Not Displayed PNT_ON_LINE.ASM
Assembly\Point_on_Line Task 1:
Position the FIXTURE_PUSH_PIN.PRT using a Point on Line constraint.
Fo r
4. Notice that the component snaps to its new location and the constraint STATUS is now Fully Constrained. 5. Click Complete Component .
2012 PTC
PT
It is important that Curve Feature 6, not the model edge, is selected as the assembly reference. Because this curve is a Composite Curve, the Coincident constraint remains connected along its entire length as it transitions from one entity to another.
In
te rn
al
Module 1 | Page 9
U se
3. Select the vertex at the end of the FIXTURE_PUSH_PIN.PRT and Curve:F6 from the FIXTURE_SLIDE.PRT.
2. Edit the definition of FIXTURE_PUSH_PIN.PRT. Notice that because the vertical orientation of the component has not been defined, the constraint STATUS is Partially Constrained.
nl y
1. Disable all Datum Display types.
Task 2:
Pattern the FIXTURE_PUSH_PIN.PRT and edit the assembly.
1. In the model tree, right-click the FIXTURE_PUSH_PIN.PRT and select Pattern. 2. Click Complete Component .
Fo r
Module 1 | Page 10
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
5. Click Regenerate from the Operations group. Notice that because of the new constraint, the FIXTURE_PUSH_PIN.PRT stays connected to the curve as the slide moves.
U se
4. Double-click the 5 value. Edit the value to 20 and press ENTER.
nl y
3. In the model tree, right-click FIXTURE_SLIDE.PRT and select Edit.
Constraining a Point on a Surface using Coincident

Using Coincident with a Point on a Surface enables you to position a component by fixing a point or vertex onto a surface or datum plane.
Figure 1 The Automatic Constraint
In
Constraining a Point on a Surface using Coincident
Fo r
Coincident can be used to constrain a point on a surface. You can use part or assembly datum points, surface features, datum planes, or solid surfaces for constraint references.
Coincident Constraint Common Uses for a Point on Surface

Coincident is used on a point and surface in a variety of situations, some of which are as follows: To position a contact location between a component vertex and the surface of another component. To fix a component datum point to a design datum or surface.
2012 PTC
PT
te rn
Figure 3 Point on Surface Position
al
Module 1 | Page 11
U se
Figure 2 Select Vertex and Surface
nl y
PROCEDURE - Constraining a Point on a Surface using Coincident

Close Window Erase Not Displayed CARBURETOR_PNT.ASM
Assembly\Point_on_Surface Task 1:
Position the IDLE_SCREW_PNT.PRT using a Coincident constraint.
5. Click Complete Component
4. Notice that the component snaps to its new location and the constraint STATUS is now Fully Constrained.
In
Fo r
6. From the In Graphics toolbar, activate Named Views select TOP. and
7. In the model tree, right-click CONTROL_ARM.PRT and select Edit. 8. Double-click the 65 value. Edit the value to 90 and press ENTER.
Module 1 | Page 12
PT
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
3. Select the vertex at the end of the IDLE_SCREW_PNT.PRT and the facing surface on CONTROL_ARM.PRT.
2. Edit the definition of IDLE_SCREW_PNT.PRT. Notice that because the depth position of the component has not been defined, the constraint STATUS is Partially Constrained.
nl y
9. Click Regenerate Operations group.
from the
10. Notice how the IDLE_SCREW_PNT.PRT maintains contact with the CONTROL_ARM.PRT and moves accordingly. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 1 | Page 13
U se
nl y
Constraining an Edge on a Surface using Coincident

The Edge on Surface constraint enables you to position a component by fixing a linear edge to a planar surface or datum plane.
Figure 1 - Select Surface and Edge
Figure 2 - Edge on Surface Constraint
Use the Coincident constraint to constrain a linear edge to a planar surface. The surface reference can be a datum plane, surface feature, or solid surface.
Coincident Constraint Common Uses for an Edge on a Surface

Coincident is used with an edge on surface constraint in a variety of situations. The most common situation is when you place the edge of a component onto the surface of another component. This method is especially helpful when you design fixtures and sheetmetal products, because both products typically contain many linear edges and planar surfaces.
Fo r
Module 1 | Page 14
PT
In
te rn
Constraining an Edge on a Surface using Coincident
al
U se
O
2012 PTC
nl y
PROCEDURE - Constraining an Edge on a Surface using Coincident

Close Window Erase Not Displayed RATCHET.ASM
Assembly\Edge_on_Surface Task 1:
Position the RATCHET_ARM.PRT using an Edge on Surface constraint.
3. Press CTRL+ALT and middle-click to spin the component so that it is close to the final assembly position shown.
4. Select the vertical edge of RATCHET_ARM.PRT and the flat surface on the hex geometry of RATCHET.PRT.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
This Coincident constraint requires a linear edge or a curve to lie on a planar surface. Because the outer walls of the RATCHET.PRT are drafted, the vertical edge on the RATCHET_ARM.PRT could not be constrained to any of the outer walls.
In
te rn
al
Module 1 | Page 15
U se
2. Edit the definition of RATCHET_ARM.PRT. Notice that because the rotational orientation of the component has not been defined, the constraint STATUS is Partially Constrained.
nl y
Constraining a Point on a Point using Coincident

Using Coincident with a Point on a Point enables you to position a component by fixing a point or vertex onto another point or vertex.
Figure 1 Select Point and Point
Constraining a Point on a Point using Coincident

You can use the Coincident constraint point on point option to position a point or vertex with another point or vertex. In the figure, the spring is positioned by constraining points at the attachment locations of the spring to the corresponding attachment points on the clutch shoes.
Coincident Constraint Common Uses for a Point on a Point
Fo r
Coincident is used with a point on a point constraint in a variety of situations, some of which are as follows: You can control component positions by aligning a vertex on one component with a vertex on another. You can use the point on point constraint when you assemble components to framework or skeletal type geometry that consists mostly of datum type features. You can easily define attachment geometry without planar or cylindrical features using datum points and then positioning the points using the point on point constraint.
Module 1 | Page 16
PT
In
te rn
Figure 2 Point on Point Constraint
al
Figure 3 Constrained Spring
U se
2012 PTC
nl y
PROCEDURE - Constraining a Point on a Point using Coincident

Close Window Erase Not Displayed CLUTCH.ASM
Assembly\Point_on_Point Task 1:
Position the CLUTCH_SPRING.PRT using two Point on Point constraints.
4. Press CTRL+ALT and middle-click to spin the component into a better position. 5. Right Click and select New Constraint. 6. In the dashboard select Coincident from the drop-down list. 7. Select point PNT2 on the CLUTCH_SPRING.PRT and SPRING1 on the CLUTCH_SHOE_R.PRT.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 1 | Page 17
U se
3. Select datum point PNT1 on the CLUTCH_SPRING.PRT and datum point SPRING1 on the CLUTCH_SHOE_L.PRT.
2. Edit the definition of CLUTCH_SPRING.PRT. Notice the constraint STATUS is Partially Constrained.
nl y
.
Creating a Tangent Constraint using Auto Constrain

The Tangent constraint enables you to position a component by constraining two surfaces at their point of tangency.
Figure 1 The Tangent Constraint
In
Creating a Tangent Constraint using Auto Constrain

The Tangent constraint can be selected automatically or manually. It is used to position the contact point of two surfaces at their point of tangency. This placement constraint causes the contacting surfaces to face each other. It is important to understand that this constraint does not align them.
Fo r
Common Uses for the Tangent Constraint

You can use the Tangent constraint in a variety of situations, some of which are as follows. A contact point between a cam and its actuator. Any design in which a cylindrical, spherical, or conical surface has a tangent contact with a planar surface. The Tangent constraint creates references from one surface patch to another. The Tangent constraint does not automatically transition from one surface patch to another to show cam and actuator type motion. You can address more complicated assembly cases using datum features within Creo Parametric or with mechanism constraint types in Creo Mechanism Dynamics Extension.
Module 1 | Page 18 2012 PTC
PT
te rn
Figure 3 Position After Edit
al
U se
Figure 2 Initial Contact Position
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating a Tangent Constraint using Auto Constrain

Close Window Assembly\Tangent Task 1: Erase Not Displayed CARBURETOR_TAN.ASM
Position the CONTROL_ARM.PRT using a Tangent constraint.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Edit the definition of CONTROL_ARM.PRT. Notice that because the rotational orientation of the component has not been defined, the constraint STATUS is Partially Constrained. 3. Select the ball end of the IDLE_SCREW.PRT and the facing surface on CONTROL_ARM.PRT. Auto constrain has Tangent selected for the constraint type.
6. From the In Graphics toolbar,
PT
In
4. Notice that the component snaps to its new location and the constraint STATUS is now Fully Constrained. .
Fo r
activate Named Views click TOP.
7. In the model tree, right-click IDLE_SCREW.PRT and select Edit. 8. Double-click the 0 value. Edit the value to 6 and press ENTER.
2012 PTC
te rn
and
al
Module 1 | Page 19
U se
nl y
9. Click Regenerate Operations group.
from the
10. Notice how the CONTROL_ARM.PRT maintains tangency with the IDLE_SCREW.PRT and moves accordingly.
Fo r
Module 1 | Page 20
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Configuring Constraint Sets with Parameters

You can create multiple constraint sets for a given component.
Multiple constraint sets Alternate assembly positions Parameter: PTC_CONSTRAINT_ SET Active set by default Edit to alternate set Can be varied in Family Table
Fo r
You can create multiple constraint sets for a given component, as shown in Figure 1. The constraint sets can be enabled or disabled to assemble components into alternate positions. When more than one constraint set is created, a feature parameter called PTC_CONSTRAINT_SET is created for the component, and the PTC_CONSTRAINT_SET parameter is set as the active constraint set by default. You can edit the parameter value to activate an alternate constraint set. The parameter can then be varied in a family table to create different variations, as shown in Figure 2 and Figure 3.
2012 PTC
PT
Configuring Constraint Sets with Parameters
In
Figure 2 First Constraint Set
te rn
al
Figure 3 Second Constraint Set
Module 1 | Page 21
U se
Figure 1 Constraint Set in Model Tree
nl y
PROCEDURE - Configuring Constraint Sets with Parameters

Close Window Erase Not Displayed DRILL_CHUCK.ASM
Advanced_Assembly\Constraint_Sets Task 1: Configure a second constraint set.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the model tree, click Settings > Tree Filters.
5. Select the Placement tab in the dashboard. 6. Select Set1 and disable Set Enabled. 7. Click New Set.
9. Drag KEY_BASE.PRT out of the model. 10. Click 3D Dragger in the dashboard to disable the 3D Dragger.
11. Select the surfaces shown.
Fo r
12. Click New Constraint. 13. Select the surfaces shown.
Module 1 | Page 22
PT
In
te rn
8. Select the set named Set6 and type Set2 in the Set Name field.
al
U se
4. Right-click KEY_BASE.PRT in the model tree and select Edit Definition.
3. Enable Placement folder in the Model Tree Items dialog box and click OK.
nl y
2012 PTC
14. Select the first constraint, Angle Offset. 15. Edit the Constraint Type to Coincident and click Flip. 16. Click Complete Component .
17. In the model tree, click Settings > Tree Columns. 18. Edit the Type to Feat Params. 19. Type PTC_CONSTRAINT_SET in the Name field, click Add Column , and edit the Width to 14. 20. Click OK. 21. In the model tree, edit Set2 to Set1. 22. Click Regenerate .
Task 2:
Configure the constraint set parameter in a Family Table.
1. In the ribbon, select the Tools tab.
Fo r
2. Click Family Table
PT
3. Click Insert Instance
In
4. Edit the instance name to DRILL_CHUCK_SET2. 5. Click Add Columns .
6. Select Parameter from the Add Item section of the Family Items dialog box. 7. Select Component from the Look In drop-down list and select KEY_BASE.PRT. 8. Select the PTC_CONSTRAINT_SET parameter. 9. Click Insert Selected and then click Close. 10. Click OK in the Family Items dialog box.
2012 PTC
te rn
from the Model Intent group. in the Family Table dialog box.
al
Module 1 | Page 23
U se
nl y
11. Edit the instances as shown.
12. Select the DRILL_CHUCK_ SET2 instance row and click Preview Instance . 13. Click Close. 14. Click OK.
Fo r
Module 1 | Page 24
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
2
U se O te rn al
Module 2 | Page 1
Creating and Using Component Interfaces

Module Overview
Component interfaces are user-defined sets of constraints and references that are stored with a model and used to quickly place that component during an assembly operation. After you define an interface, you can use it whenever you place the component in an assembly. Adding component interfaces to an organization's standard components increases assembly productivity, enabling faster and more accurate component placement. The same functionality used in component interfaces is also used to place components using Copy and Paste, Repeat, and Auto Place.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: Create and use a placement component interface. Create and use a receiving component interface. Create a component interface using the Save As Interface dialog box. Auto place components in an assembly. Copy and paste components within assemblies. Repeat the placement of components within an assembly.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
nl y
Understanding Component Interfaces

Component interface features contain stored constraints and references used to assemble components more efficiently.
Elements of a component interface: Interface Name Interface Template Interface Type, Placing or Receiving Constraints and References
Figure 1 Constraints and References on the Model
Understanding Component Interfaces
Fo r
Elements of a Component Interface

A unique set of elements are used to define a component interface.
Interface Name Used to identify and select the component interface. Interface Template Used to create interfaces with mechanism connection sets. Placement/Receiving Interface Determines if the component interface is used for placing the component or receiving another component. The Either type interface can be used for either placing or receiving.
PT
You can add Component Interface features to part or assembly models. Like any feature, component interfaces appear in the model tree, have their own identifying icon, and can be edited.
Component interfaces are user-defined sets of constraints stored in a model and used to quickly place components during assembly operations. After a component interface is defined, you can reuse it during any assembly operation.
In
te rn
Module 2 | Page 2
al
Figure 2 Constraints and References in the Model Tree
Figure 3 Constraints and References in the Dialog Box
U se
Figure 4 Elements
2012 PTC
nl y
Constraints Each component interface contains a set of predefined constraints that are applied when using the interface. References Each component interface contains selected geometry, corresponding to each constraint in the interface.
Figure 5 Constraints and References
Dependent Select Dependent to ensure that Offset types (Coincident, Orient, Offset) and orientations (Mate, Align) cannot be changed.
Creating a Component Interface
Component interfaces are created explicitly using the Component Interface dialog box or on-the-fly by saving a component's existing set of assembly constraints.
PT
Figure 6 Dialog Box
In
te rn
Figure 7 Save as Interface
Fo r
Placing Components using Component Interfaces

When placing a component containing an interface, the placement dashboard presents you with the following placement options: Interface to Geom Place a component containing an interface in an assembly without a receiving interface. You are required to select matching references from the assembly.
al
Figure 8 Interface to Geom
2012 PTC Module 2 | Page 3
U se
nl y
If you delete a component interface, any components referencing the interface fail to regenerate and you are required to select new references.
Interface to Interface Place a component containing an interface in an assembly containing a receiving interface. To position components, you click one or more white circles. Each circle represents a receiving interface. Figure 9 Interface to Interface Multiple Interfaces When the component being placed contains multiple component interfaces, the default is used unless you select another interface from the drop-down list.
Figure 10 Multiple Interfaces Place Manually Click Place Manually from the dashboard to assemble a component without using an existing interface.
Fo r
Module 2 | Page 4
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
Figure 11 Place Manually
O
2012 PTC
nl y
Using a Placing Component Interface

You use a Placing Component interface when inserting a component into an assembly.
Placing Component Interface: Interface Name Component Constraints Component References
Figure 1 Dialog Box
Figure 2 As Seen in the Model Tree
Fo r
The Either type interface can also be used as a Placing interface. The Either type interface behaves as a Placing interface when it is inserted into an assembly. The Either type also behaves as a Receiving interface when components are added to it. While flexible, this behavior may or may not meet your needs.
Placing Interface Feature Location

By default, both the Placing and Either component interfaces are created in the Interfaces folder, found in the footer of the model tree. To move an interface from the footer, select it in the model tree, right-click, and select Move from footer.
Designate Default
If a model contains more than one Placing or Either interface, the first one created is the default interface. The default interface is the interface first used when the component is placed in an assembly. You can select the other interfaces of a component from the drop-down list in the assembly dashboard. To designate another interface as the default, select the feature in the model tree, right-click, and select Set Default.
PT
These interfaces are typically added to standard hardware components so that you can easily and quickly place them in assemblies.
In
You use Placing Component interfaces to save constraints and associated references that you typically use to assemble a component. Each time you assemble that component, the constraints and references of the component interface are preselected, enabling a more efficient assembly process.
te rn
Understanding Placing Interfaces
al
U se
Figure 3 References and Constraints
nl y
Using a Placing Interface

When you assemble a component with a Placing interface in a model that does not contain receiving interfaces, the constraints and associated references of the component interface are automatically selected. This is an Interface to Geometry assembly, and you are only required to select corresponding reference geometry from the assembly model. If a component contains multiple interfaces, select the interface you would like to use from the interface list in the assembly dashboard. If you do not want to use any of a component's interfaces, select Place Manually from the dashboard.
Fo r
Module 2 | Page 6
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Using a Placing Component Interface

Close Window Erase Not Displayed PLACING_BOLT.PRT
Assembly\Interface_Placing Task 1:
Create a Placing Component interface.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the model tree, click Settings > Tree Filters.... 3. Under Display, select the Features, Placement folder and Annotations check boxes. 4. Click OK. 5. Click Component Interface from the Model Intent group. Type insert_mate as the interface name. Notice the Interface Template drop-down list contains only Mechanism connection sets. Select Placing from the Placement/Receiving Interface drop-down list.
Fo r
6. Select the cylindrical surface of PLACING_BOLT.PRT as an Insert reference. 7. Select the bottom of the bolt head as a Mate reference. 8. Click Complete Feature .
2012 PTC
PT
At any time, you can edit the interface properties defined by clicking the interface name in the upper-left corner of the dialog box.
Both Coincident constraints were created using the Automatic constraint type. You can select specific constraint types from the Constraint Type drop-down list.
In
te rn
al
Module 2 | Page 7
U se
nl y
9. In the model tree, expand the Footer and INTERFACES groups. Observe the INSERT_MATE feature. 10. Expand the INSERT_MATE feature and notice the features listed constraints. Task 2: Insert a component using its placing interface. . Select PLACING_INTF.ASM and click Open. from the Component group.
1. Click Open
2. Click Assemble
3. In the Open dialog box, select PLACING_BOLT.PRT and click Open. In the ribbon, notice that because PLACING_BOLT.PRT contains a Component interface, the placement method has defaulted to Place Using Interface.
Fo r
5. Select the top surface of PLACING_INTF.PRT as the assembly's Mate reference. 6. Click Complete Component .
Module 2 | Page 8
PT
In
te rn
4. Select a surface in the upper-left hole in PLACING_INTF.PRT as the assembly's Insert reference.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
7. Using the previous steps, place three additional bolts into the assembly.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 2 | Page 9
U se
nl y
Using a Receiving Component Interface

You use a Receiving type component interface to receive and automatically place components containing Placing interfaces.
Receiving component interfaces: Automatic Interface to Interface assembly. Select multiple receiving interfaces to place multiple components.
Figure 1 White Circles Represent Receiving Interfaces
Using a Receiving Component Interface
Receiving type interfaces automatically receive and position components containing Placing or Either type interfaces. You typically add Receiving interfaces to components that routinely have models assembled to them that contain component interfaces. These include models with holes that receive bolts, bolts that receive nuts, washers, and so on. The Either type interface can also be used as a Receiving interface. The Either type interface behaves as a Receiving interface when components are assembled to it. The Either type interface behaves as a Placing interface when inserted into an assembly. While flexible, this behavior may or may not meet your needs.
Fo r
Receiving Interface Feature Location

By default, Receiving component interfaces are placed in the model tree along with other features and components. Unlike Placing interfaces, you do not create them in the footer of the model tree. To move a Receiving interface to the footer, right-click it in the model tree and select Move to footer.
Designate Default
Unlike Placing or Either type interfaces, you cannot designate a Receiving interface as a default component interface. This is because all receiving interfaces are active when you place a component.
Using Receiving Interfaces

When you insert a component with a Placing or Either type interface into an assembly with a Receiving interface, Creo Parametric defaults to the
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Interface to Interface assembly method. Small white circles appear in the assembly. Each white circle represents a Receiving interface in the assembly. Select one or more of the white circles to place a component at that interface location. If a component being assembled does not contain a Placing or Either interface, the Receiving interface is not recognized and cannot be referenced. If you do not want to use the Receiving interface, edit the assembly method to Interface to Geom and select assembly references as required. If you do not want to use interfaces for assembly, click Place Manually from the dashboard.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 2 | Page 11
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Using a Receiving Component Interface

Close Window Erase Not Displayed RECEIVE_INTF.ASM
Assembly\Interface_Receiving Task 1:
Create a Receiving Component interface.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the model tree, click Settings > Tree Filters....
3. Under Display, select the Features, Placement folder and Annotations check boxes. 4. Click OK.
5. In the model tree, right-click RECEIVE_INTF.PRT and select Open. 6. Click Component Interface from the Model Intent group. Type insert_mate_hex as the Interface Name. Select Receiving from the Placement/Receiving Interface drop-down list. Click Yes from the Remove Default warning dialog box.
Fo r
7. Select the cylindrical surface of the hole in the lower-left corner of RECEIVE_INTF.PRT as an Insert reference. 8. Select the top surface of the model as a Coincident reference. 9. Click Complete Feature .
Both Coincident constraints were created using the Automatic constraint type. You can select specific constraint types from the Constraint Type drop-down list.
Module 2 | Page 12
PT
You receive the Remove Default warning because Receiving Component interfaces cannot be set to default.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
10. In the model tree, expand the INSERT_MATE_HEX feature. Notice that Receiving Component interfaces are not located in the model footer. 11. In the model tree, right-click the INSERT_MATE_HEX component interface and select Pattern.
13. Click Close Task 2:
Insert a component using an Interface to Interface placement.
1. Click Assemble
from the Component group.
2. In the Open dialog box, select RECEIVE_BOLT.PRT and click Open. 3. You immediately notice eight small white circles, each representing a Receiving Component interface. Place the component three times by clicking the interfaces shown in the figure.
Fo r
4. In the dashboard, select INSERT_MATE_OFFSET from the Component Interface drop-down list. This selection will change the interface used to place the highlighted component.
2012 PTC
PT
The RECEIVE_BOLT.PRT model contains two Component Interfaces, INSERT_MATE and INSERT_MATE_OFFSET. The INSERT_MATE interface is the default interface.
In
te rn
al
Module 2 | Page 13
U se
nl y
12. Click Complete Feature
to complete the Reference pattern.
5. Click on the fourth interface shown. This component is also placed using the selected INSERT_MATE_OFFSET interface. 6. Click Complete Component This completes the procedure. .
Fo r
Module 2 | Page 14
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Creating a Component Interface using the Save as Interface Dialog Box

You can save assembly constraints and references to a component interface using the Save as Interface dialog box.
Save as Interface: Efficient Reuse
Figure 1 Save as Interface Dialog Box
You can save the constraints and references used to assemble a component to a component interface feature using the Save as Interface dialog box. With the assembly dashboard open, right-click in the graphics window and select Save as Interface. This opens the Save as Interface dialog box, enabling you to create the Either type interface. You can save interfaces by editing the definition of a component and then saving its interface during the initial assembly process, after all constraints and references have been defined, or at a later time.
Save as Interface Type
Fo r
An interface saved using the Save as Interface dialog box is created as an Either type interface. If you need to change it to a Placing or Receiving interface, you can edit the definition of the interface to do so.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Creating a Component Interface using the Save as Interface Dialog Box
U se
O
Module 2 | Page 15
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating a Component Interface using the Save as Interface Dialog Box
Close Window Erase Not Displayed SAVE_AS_INTF.ASM
Assembly\Interface_Save-As Task 1:
Insert a component and save the interface.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Click Assemble Component group. from the
3. In the Open dialog box, select INTF_CAP.PRT and click Open. 4. Select a cylindrical surface on INTF_CAP.PRT and a surface in the lower-left hole of SAVE_AS_INTF.PRT to create a Coincident constraint.
7. Right-click in the graphics window and select Save as Interface.
Fo r
8. Type insert_mate in the Name field of the dialog box and click OK. 9. Click Complete Component .
Task 2:
1. Click Assemble
PT
6. Select the small surface at the bottom of the sphere-shaped head of INTF_CAP.PRT and the top surface of SAVE_AS_INTF.PRT to create a Coincident constraint.
Insert the cap model again using the new component interface.
2. In the Open dialog box, select INTF_CAP.PRT and click Open.
Module 2 | Page 16
In
te rn
5. Press CTRL+ALT, right-click, and drag INTF_CAP.PRT up and out of SAVE_AS_INTF.PRT, if required.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
3. Using the newly created component interface, select the lower-right hole in SAVE_AS_INTF.PRT as the assembly's first Coincident reference. 4. Select the top of SAVE_AS_INTF.PRT as the assembly's second Coincident reference.
Task 3:
Edit the interface to a Placing type component interface.
1. In the model tree, right-click the top INTF_CAP.PRT and select Open. 2. In the model tree, expand the Footer and INTERFACES groups. 3. Right-click the INSERT_MATE feature and select Edit Definition. 4. Click INSERT_MATE in the upper-left corner of the Component Interface dialog box.
In
5. Select Placing from the Placement/Receiving Interface drop-down list. .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
te rn
al
Module 2 | Page 17
U se
nl y
Auto Placing Components

You can position components containing component interfaces in an assembly using Auto Place.
Auto Place dialog box: Screen Point Search Scope Locations Found Locations Selected Preferences
Figure 2 Auto Place Button
Figure 1 Auto Place Dialog Box
Understanding Auto Place
Auto Place Workflows
Before selecting any references, click Auto Place in the assembly dashboard. This opens the Auto Place dialog box enabling you to do the following: Select a screen point for Creo Parametric to begin searching for a suitable assembly location. Select components limiting the search scope for Creo Parametric to use when searching for a suitable assembly location. After locating the correct position(s), use Add Item to select the position. You can select multiple locations for assembly. Preselect components to limit the search scope of the Auto Place position search. In this case, as soon as you insert a component, the Auto Place dialog box opens with the search scope model(s) already listed. Select a screen point for Creo Parametric to begin searching for a suitable assembly location. The search scope is already defined with this workflow. After locating the correct position(s), use Add Item to select the position. You can select multiple locations for assembly.
Fo r
PT
There are two basic workflows you can follow when positioning components using Auto Place.
In
The Auto Place functionality in Creo Parametric positions a component containing a component interface into an assembly based on a selected screen point location and search scope.
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Auto Place Preferences

You can adjust placement search preferences at any time during the operation. You can adjust the maximum number of locations. By default, Creo Parametric searches for and finds five possible assembly locations. Increasing this amount enables you to find more assembly locations, but it also slows down the search process. You can also increase or decrease the search area around the selected screen point to effect performance as well as the number of locations found.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 2 | Page 19
U se
With all but the smallest assemblies, it is important to limit the search scope to a component or two. An assembly-wide search scope increases search time and may not provide good results.
nl y
Best Practices
PROCEDURE - Auto Placing Components

Close Window Erase Not Displayed AUTO-PLACE.ASM
Assembly\Auto-Place Task 1:
Place a component using Auto Place.
In
1. Select GEARBOX_REAR_AUTO.PRT.
Fo r
2. Click Assemble
PT
Because GEARBOX_REAR_AUTO.PRT was preselected, the Auto Place dialog box automatically opens, listing the first five potential placement locations found in the part.
Module 2 | Page 20
Task 2:
Auto place additional components, limiting the search scope to a selected component.
. Select BOLT_6-20.PRT and click Open.
te rn
.
5. Select the correct location and click Add Item in the Auto Place dialog box. Then click Close.
al
2012 PTC
4. In the Auto Place dialog box, select each of the locations found to identify the correct placement location.
U se
3. Click Auto Place from the dashboard, then click the left hole to auto place the component.
nl y
in the 2. Click Assemble Component group. Select BOLT_6-20.PRT and click Open.
3. In the Auto Place dialog box, select and review each of the locations found. Notice that GEARBOX_ REAR_AUTO.PRT is specified in the Auto Place dialog box as an item to define the search scope.
Fo r
7. Review the remaining locations to find the bolt positioned in the remaining hole. Click Add Item in the Auto Place dialog box, then click Close. 8. Click Complete Component
PT
In
6. Select the first correct location, and click Add Item in the Auto Place dialog box.
2012 PTC
te rn
.
5. Begin selecting each location starting at number 6. Stop when you have identified the location that positions the bolt in either the center or right side hole shown in the figure.
al
Module 2 | Page 21
U se
4. If the correct location is not in the list of five, click Preferences. Edit the Max number of locations from 5 to 20.
nl y
Copying and Pasting Components

You can copy and then paste a component, its placement constraints, and its references.
Copy and Paste: Component Constraints References
Figure 1 Pasting a Component into Position
Copying and Pasting Components
Use the following workflow to copy and paste components within an assembly. Select the component to copy and either click Edit > Copy or use the keyboard shortcut CTRL+C to copy it. Paste the component into the desired assembly by clicking Edit > Paste or use the keyboard shortcut CTRL+V. An unconstrained copy of the component appears in the graphics area. Select assembly references corresponding to those in the component.
Fo r
Best Practices
Copy and Paste is a very efficient method to use when copying a single component in an assembly multiple times. Depending on your situation, the Repeat functionality may be even more efficient.
Module 2 | Page 22
PT
Copy and Paste Component Workflow
When you copy a component, the constraints and references used to place it are also copied. When you paste the component into an assembly, you also paste the constraints and references with it, enabling you to place the component by selecting corresponding assembly references.
In
te rn
You can copy and then paste components within the current assembly or into other assemblies. One of the most efficient methods for placing a component multiple times within an assembly is to use Copy and Paste. This is also an efficient method for copying a component from one assembly into another.
al
U se
O
2012 PTC
nl y
PROCEDURE - Copying and Pasting Components

Close Window Erase Not Displayed COPY_PASTE.ASM
Component_Operations\Copy_Paste Task 1:
Copy and paste a component within the assembly.
3. Press CTRL+C to copy the component. 4. Press CTRL+V to paste the component. 5. Select a surface in the middle hole as the assembly's first Coincident reference. 6. Select the front surface as the assembly's second Coincident reference. 7. Click Complete Component
Fo r
9. Select a surface in the far-right hole as the assembly's first Coincident reference.
10. Select the front surface as the assembly's second Coincident reference.
PT
8. Press CTRL+V again to paste a second instance of the bolt.
In
2012 PTC
te rn
. .
al
Module 2 | Page 23
U se
nl y
2. Select BOLT_6-25.PRT.
Task 2:
Copy and paste a component to another assembly.
1. Click Open and double-click CARBURETOR.ASM to open the assembly. 2. Press CTRL+V to paste the component into the new assembly.
5. Select the front surface as the assembly's second Coincident reference. 6. Click Complete Component .
Fo r
Module 2 | Page 24
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
4. Select a surface in the left hole as the assembly's first Coincident reference.
nl y
3. Press CTRL+ALT, right-click, and drag the copied bolt to the position shown in the figure.
Repeating Component Placement

You can use the Repeat Component tool to place a component multiple times within an assembly.
Repeat using the model tree. Repeat using the Repeat Component dialog box: Component Variable Assembly Refs Place Component
Repeating Component Placement
Fo r
Using the Repeat Component Dialog Box

The Repeat Component dialog box contains the following elements used to repeat the placement of a component: Component The component selected prior to opening the Repeat Component dialog box is listed in the Component section of the dialog box. In the dialog box, you can leave the component selected or select a different component to be repeated. A component must be preselected or the Repeat menu pick is grayed out. Varied Assembly Refs This field lists all constraints used to place the selected component. Select the constraint that will be different for each repeated component placement. For example, when repeating the placement of a bolt into various holes in a block, you select only the Insert constraint, not the Mate constraint. This is
PT
You can also repeat the placement of a component one time by right-clicking one or more of its constraints in the model tree and then selecting Repeat from the shortcut menu.
You can use the Repeat Component dialog box to quickly place a component multiple times throughout an assembly. To open the Repeat Component dialog box, select the component you want to repeat, then right-click the component and select Repeat.
In
te rn
Figure 1 Repeat Using the Model Tree
al
U se
Figure 2 Repeat Component Dialog Box
nl y
because the bolt will be inserted into different holes, but the head of the bolt will always mate to the same surface. If more than one constraint will vary, press CTRL and select each varying constraint. Place Component To repeat a component's placement, click the Add button after selecting constraints to vary. As you select new assembly references, components are added to the assembly and listed in the Place Component field. To remove a repeated component, select it in the list and click the Remove button.
Fo r
Module 2 | Page 26
PT
In
te rn
al
Unlike the Repeat Component dialog box that enables you to repeat the placement of a component multiple times, this technique only enables you to repeat placement one component at a time.
U se
To repeat the placement of a component using the model tree, expand the components placement and constraint set nodes. In the constraint set node, right-click the constraint(s) you wish to repeat and click Repeat from the shortcut menu. This opens the component placement dashboard and displays the new component in the graphics window, enabling you to select required references for the components placement.
nl y
2012 PTC
Repeat using the Model Tree
PROCEDURE - Repeating Component Placement

Close Window Erase Not Displayed REPEAT.ASM
Component_Operations\Repeat Task 1:
Repeat the placement of a component and vary a single reference.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the model tree, click Settings > Tree Filters.... 3. Under Display, select the Placement folder check box and click OK. 4. In the model tree, right-click BOLT_5-18.PRT and click Repeat. 5. In the Variable Assembly Refs field of the Repeat Component dialog box, select the first Coincident reference and click Add. 6. Reorient the assembly, as necessary, to select the three inside hole surfaces.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
7. Click Confirm in the Repeat Component dialog box to complete the assembly of the three bolts.
In
te rn
al
Module 2 | Page 27
U se
nl y
Task 2:
Repeat the placement of a component and vary two references.
1. In the model tree, right-click the last instance of BOLT_6-25.PRT and click Repeat. 2. In the Variable Assembly Refs field of the Repeat Component dialog box, select both Coincident references and click Add. 3. Reorient the assembly and select the inner hole surface as the first coincident constraint reference and the front surface as the second coincident constraint reference. 4. Click Confirm in the Repeat Component dialog box to complete the assembly of the two bolts.
1. In the model tree, expand the first instance of BOLT_6-25.PRT.
Fo r
2. Expand the Placement node and the Set25 node. 3. Right-click the top Coincident constraint and select Repeat. 4. Select the cylindrical surface of the hole located at the upper-center of GEARBOX_ REAR_REPEAT.PRT, as shown in the figure. 5. Click Complete Component Using this method, you can only repeat one component at a time. .

PT
Task 3:
Repeat the placement of another component using the model tree.
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Module
3
U se O te rn al
Module 3 | Page 1
Creating and Using Flexible Components

Module Overview
A flexible component readily adapts to new, different, or changing requirements within an assembly. You can include it in an assembly in various states. Each flexible state is defined by any combination of variable dimensions, features, geometric tolerances, surface finishes, and parameters. For example, a spring can have various compression lengths in different places throughout an assembly. You can define flexibility for any part or sub-assembly and you can use it for every placement instance of the component.
After completing this module, you will be able to: Add flexibility to a component. Place flexible components into assemblies. Use a measured distance to define a flexible dimension. Add flexibility to components already placed in assemblies. Add a feature as a flexible item in a model. Use a measured diameter to define a flexible dimension. Edit the flexibility of a component in an assembly. Use flexible parameters.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
Objectives
nl y
Adding Flexibility to a Component

Flexibility enables selected component items to vary, or flex, within an assembly.
Variable Items Dimensions Features Parameters Surface Finish Geometric Tolerances Components
Figure 1 Prepare Varied Items
Figure 2 Free State Contact
Understanding Flexibility
Fo r
Creo Parametric enables you to add flexibility to a component by changing the value of selected component items. Note that this change is only within the assembly; the part remains unaltered. You can select dimensions, parameters, surface finishes, geometric tolerances, features, and components as flexible items and vary their values during assembly.
Flexible Items
To open the Flexibility: Prepare Varied Items dialog box, click File > Prepare > Model Properties and click change in the Flexible row of the Tools section of the Model Properties dialog box. Flexible items are selected in the model and added to the Flexibility dialog box. Dimensions You can select any model dimension as a flexible item. When the component is placed in an assembly, you are given the option to vary one, none, or all of the flexible dimension values in the dialog box. The following methods can be used to define the flexible value: By value Flexible dimension values can be controlled by typing a value in the New Value field of the dialog box. Curve Length Measure a curve length to define the flexible dimension value.
PT
Components such as springs, clips, rubber washers, and so on, all typically vary geometrically in their assembled condition. These are called flexible components. A spring, for example, can have various compression lengths throughout an assembly.
In
te rn
al
Figure 3 Compressed Contact in Assembly
U se
nl y
Best Practices
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
You should always test your model to ensure that it will regenerate successfully using the same dimension values and feature statuses that are used when it is placed in an assembly as a flexible component. To test the model, edit the value and status of all flexible items to ensure they regenerate successfully at those values.
al
U se
nl y
Distance Measure a distance between two entities to define the flexible dimension value. Angle Measure an angle to define the flexible dimension value. Area Measure a surface area to define the flexible dimension value. Diameter Measure diameter to define the flexible dimension value. Geometric Tolerances You can vary the value of geometric tolerances to ensure that a component is not flexed to the breaking point. Parameters You can designate a parameter as flexible and vary the value upon assembly. This is a powerful tool when used in conjunction with relations to define known assembly states. Surface Finish You can vary the value of a flexible Surface Finish symbol within an assembly to meet the varying finish conditions at different locations within an assembly. Features You can suppress and resume flexible features within an assembly. Components You can suppress and resume components within an assembly. You only see the Components tab when adding flexibility to an assembly model.
Module 3 | Page 3
PROCEDURE - Adding Flexibility to a Component

Close Window Erase Not Displayed ADDING_FLEX.ASM
Component_Operations\Flexible_Adding Task 1: Add a flexible dimension.
3. In the model tree, select ADDING_FLEX.PRT. 4. In the Flexibility dialog box, select the Dimensions tab, if necessary. 5. In the graphics window, select ADDING_FLEX.PRT. 6. Select the 60 degree dimension. 7. Select Add to add it to the list of variable dimensions. Task 2: Add a flexible feature.
3. Select Add of features.
Fo r
4. Click OK in the Flexibility dialog box.
5. In the Tools section, click Expand in the Flexible row to verify that one flexible feature has been defined. This completes the procedure.
Module 3 | Page 4
PT
2. Select the topmost section of the part. to add it to the list
1. In the Flexibility dialog box, select the Features tab.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
2. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties to access the Model Properties dialog box. In the Tools section, click change in the Flexible row.
Placing Flexible Components in an Assembly

When placing a flexible component, you can use or ignore the flexible definition.
Placing Flexible Components Confirm the use of flexible definition. Type values for variable items.
Figure 1 Type Values for Variable Items
Click Yes in the Confirm dialog box, to confirm that you want to use the flexibility defined in the component. In the Varied Items dialog box for the component, type new values for the items you want to make flexible.
Flexible Items
Fo r
You are not required to type a new value for every item in the Varied Items dialog box. You should only type values that are required to define flexibility for the instance being placed. A flexible component used several times within an assembly may have a different flexible definition each time it is used.
Flexible Values
Except for features, the flexible value for any item is, by default, defined using the By value method, in which you type a new value in the New Value field of the dialog box. For flexible dimensions, the following five measurement-based methods can be used to define the flexible value: Curve Length Measures a curve length to define the flexible dimension value. Distance Measures a distance between two entities to define the flexible dimension value.
PT
If you do not want to place a component in its flexible state, click No in the Confirm dialog box and continue with the assembly as normal.
In
te rn
Placing a flexible component is not much different than placing a non-flexible component. There are just two additional steps added to the process.
al
Placing Flexible Components
U se
nl y
Angle Measures an angle to define the flexible dimension value. Area Measures a surface area to define the flexible dimension value. Diameter Measures the diameter to define the flexible dimension value. Flexible features are not varied using a flexible value. Instead, they have a flexible status that you can edit to either Resumed or Suppressed.
Fo r
Module 3 | Page 6
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Placing Flexible Components in an Assembly

Close Window Erase Not Displayed PLACING_FLEX.ASM
Component_Operations\Flexible_Placing Task 1: Add a flexible part to an assembly.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Click Assemble , select FLEX_CONTACT.PRT, and click Open.
3. Click Yes to confirm using the models predefined flexibility. 4. Select the Dimensions tab in the Varied Items dialog box, if necessary. 5. Click in the New Value field for the ang dimension, and type 90. 6. Select the Features tab and then click in the New Status field. Select Suppressed from the drop-down menu. 7. Click Yes from the Warning prompt, and OK to close the Varied Items dialog box.
9. Select the surface in the connector slot as the assembly's Coincident reference.
Fo r
10. Select the top surface of the connector as the assembly's Parallel reference. 11. Click Complete Component .
2012 PTC
PT
8. Select the radial surface at the bottom of the connector slot as the assembly's Coincident reference.
In
te rn
al
Module 3 | Page 7
U se
nl y
Task 2:
Pattern the contact placement and verify the correct placement.
1. In the model tree, right-click FLEX_CONTACT.PRT and select Pattern.... 2. Click Complete Feature to create the Reference pattern. 3. Click View Manager Graphics toolbar. from In
Task 3:
Edit the free state contact part and update the connector assembly.
2. In the model tree, right-click Extrude 1 and select Edit.
Fo r
5. Right-click PLACING_FLEX. ASM in the model tree, and select Regenerate to update the assembly.
Module 3 | Page 8
PT
4. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar to return to the assembly.
In
3. Edit the 4 dimension to 8 and press ENTER.
te rn
al
1. In the model tree, expand the pattern, right-click any FLEX_CONTACT.PRT and select Open.
U se
6. In the view manager, click Close.
O
2012 PTC
5. Verify the correct placement of FLEX_CONTACT.PRT.
nl y
4. Select the Sections tab and double-click A.
Adding Flexibility to Already Placed Components

You can add flexibility to any component already in an assembly.
Make Flexible Edit Flexibility
Figure 2 Add Varied Items
Adding Flexibility to an Already Placed Component

Many designs contain flexible components such as springs, clips, rubber washers, and so on. All of these components typically vary geometrically in their assembled condition. For example, you can position a spring with various compression lengths in different locations throughout an assembly.
Fo r
Adding Flexible Items

To make a component of an assembly flexible, select the component, right-click it, and select Make Flexible. This will open the File Name: Prepare Varied Items dialog box. With the dialog box open, you can select flexible items and type values that are used by the flexible component.
Editing Flexibility of an Already Placed Component

To edit the flexibility of an already placed component, select the component, right-click it, and select Edit Definition. From the Component Placement dashboard, select the Flexibility tab. Then select the Varied Items button.
Best Practices
Predefined flexibility that you add to a component is saved with that component model, and can be used anytime that component is placed.
PT
Creo Parametric enables you to select any component in an assembly and make it flexible. The component does not have to contain predefined flexible items.
In
te rn
Figure 1 Add Flexibility to an Assembly
al
U se
nl y
Flexibility that is added to an already-placed component is not saved with the component. The flexibility is only saved within the assembly model. To save time, you should add and save flexible items in components that are regularly assembled in a flexible state. This way you are not required to re-select the items each time the component is placed.
Fo r
Module 3 | Page 10
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Adding Flexibility to Already Placed Components

Close Window Erase Not Displayed FLEX_PLACED.ASM
Component_Operations\Flexible_Placed Task 1:
Add flexibility to a component in the assembly.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Click View Manager the In Graphics toolbar. from
4. Notice the interferences between the models.
6. In the NOZZLE_HOUSE_B : Varied Items dialog box, select the Dimensions tab. In the graphics window, select feature Hole 1. Select the dimension 12. to add it to the Select Add list of variable dimensions. Type 14 as the value in the New Value cell. Click OK.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
5. From the model tree, right-click NOZZLE_HOUSE_B.PRT and select Make Flexible.
In
te rn
al
Module 3 | Page 11
U se
3. Select the Sections tab in the View Manager dialog box and double-click A. Then click Close.
nl y
7. Click Complete Component 8. Click View Manager the In Graphics toolbar. from
9. Double-click section A, then click Close. The interference has been eliminated from NOZZLE_HOUSE_B.PRT but remains in NOZZLE_HOUSE_T.PRT.
Task 2:
Add flexibility to a second component in the assembly.
1. From the model tree, right-click NOZZLE_HOUSE_T.PRT and select Make Flexible. 2. In the Varied Items dialog box, select the Dimensions tab, if necessary. In the graphics window, select feature Extrude 3. This is the inner cut in the NOZZLE_HOUSE_T.PRT model, highlighted in yellow. Select the dimension 8. to add it to the Click Add list of variable dimensions. Type 9 as the value in the New Value cell. Click OK.
Fo r
3. Click Complete Component from
PT
In
4. Click View Manager the In Graphics toolbar.
5. Double-click section A, then click Close. The interference has increased. The dimension was flexed in the wrong direction.
Module 3 | Page 12
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Task 3:
Edit the flexibility of a component in the assembly.
1. In the model tree, right-click NOZZLE_HOUSE_T.PRT and select Edit Definition. 2. From the Component Placement dashboard, select the Flexibility tab. 3. On the Flexibility tab, click the Varied Items button. 4. In the Varied Items dialog box, edit the New Value to 7. 5. Click OK. 6. Click Complete Component 7. Click View Manager the In Graphics toolbar. from .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
The interference has been eliminated.
al
Module 3 | Page 13
8. Double-click section A, then click Close.
U se
nl y
Using Flexible Parameters

You can use flexible parameters with relations to create predefined flexible states of a model.
Flexible Parameter CLAMP_POS Dimensions
Relations IF (CLAMP_POS) == 1 head_ang_dim = 45 stroke_dim = 0 ELSE ...
Parameter Controlled Relations
Fo r
Relations using a parameter called CLAMP_POS to define two predefined states of a flexible model are shown below. IF (CLAMP_POS) == 1 stroke_dim = 0 head_ang_dim = 45 ELSE IF (CLAMP_POS) == 2 stroke_dim = 34 head_ang_dim = 0 ENDIF
Module 3 | Page 14
PT
For example, if the value of flexible parameter CLAMP_POS is 1, the stroke distance and head angle dimensions receive one set of values. If the value of CLAMP_POS is 2, the dimensions receive another set of values.
In
You can use flexible parameters and relations to establish a predefined set of flexible model states. You select and use a set of dimension values defining each flexible state of the model, based on the flexible parameter value used during assembly.
te rn
Predefined Flexible States
al
Figure 1 Flexible Parameter Values
U se
O
2012 PTC
nl y
head_ang_dim stroke_dim
PROCEDURE - Using Flexible Parameters

Close Window Erase Not Displayed FLEX_PARAMS.ASM
Component_Operations\Flexible_Parameters
Task 1:
Verify that the parameter and relations control the assembly.
4. Edit the value of CLAMP_POS to 2 and click OK. 5. Click Regenerate Operations group.
Fo r
6. Click Parameters , from the Model Intent group, edit the value of CLAMP_POS to 0 and click OK. 7. Click Regenerate from the Operations group.
2012 PTC
PT
The parameter change has forced a change in the assembly dimensions.
The assembly does not change after this regeneration. Your relations do not specify dimension values to use when the CLAMP_POS is edited to 0, thus the assembly has not changed.
In
te rn
from the
3. Click Local Parameters to expand the dialog box.
al
Module 3 | Page 15
Click Relations , from the Model Intent group. Highlight stroke_dim in the set of relations, then click to Display Dimension display it in the model. Highlight head_ang_dim and display it in the model.
U se
nl y
2. In the ribbon, select the Model tab, if necessary.
Task 2:
Edit dimensions and the parameter to be flexible.
1. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties to access the Model Properties dialog box. In the Tools section, click change in the Flexible row. 2. In the model tree, select CYL_CLAMP_PIN.PRT.
3. In the graphics area, press CTRL and select both dimension.
6. Select the CLAMP_POS parameter, then click Insert Selected and Close. 7. Click OK in the Flexibility dialog box.
Fo r
1. Click Open from the Quick access toolbar, select TOOL.ASM, and click Open. from the Component group, select FLEX_PARAMS.ASM, and click Open.
2. In the ribbon, select the Model tab, if necessary. Click Assemble
3. Click Yes to confirm using the models predefined flexibility. 4. On the Dimensions tab of the Varied Items dialog box, type 0 in the New Value field for the stroke_dim. 5. Click OK to close the Varied Items dialog box. 6. Place the sub-assembly by clicking the white dot of the receiving interface in the lower-left corner of the assembly. 7. Click Complete Component .
Module 3 | Page 16
PT
Task 3:
Insert the flexible clamp assembly into another assembly.
9. Click Close in the Model Properties dialog box.
In
8. In the Tools section, click Expand in the Flexible row to verify that two flexible dimensions and one flexible parameter have been defined.
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
5. Select the Parameters tab.
4. Click OK in the Select dialog box.
nl y
8. In the ribbon, select the Model tab, if necessary. Click Assemble from the Component group, select FLEX_PARAMS.ASM, and click Open. 9. Click Yes to confirm using the model's predefined flexibility. 10. Select the Parameters tab in the Varied Items dialog box and type a new value of 1 for the CLAMP_POS parameter. Click OK to close. 11. Place the sub-assembly by clicking the white dot of the receiving interface, in the upper-left corner of the assembly.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 3 | Page 17
U se
13. Place a third instance of FLEX_PARAMS.ASM in the upper-right corner of the assembly; this time use a flexible CLAMP_POS value of 2.
nl y
Fo r
Module 3 | Page 18
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
4
U se O te rn al
Module 4 | Page 1
Restructuring and Mirroring Assemblies

Module Overview
The assembly structure of a design often changes throughout the design process. The Restructure tool in Creo Parametric provides a tool for reorganizing the assembly structure of your design. Mirror functionality in Creo Parametric enables you to create mirrored copies of parts and assemblies. You can mirror geometry and placement of models as dependent or independent copies of the original models.
Objectives
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
After completing this module, you will be able to: Restructure and reorder components in an assembly. Mirror an assembly structure. Mirror a component inside an assembly. Mirror a sub-assembly inside an assembly.
In
nl y
Restructuring and Reordering Assembly Components

The Restructure tool enables you to move components to different locations in an assembly structure.
Restructure Diagram Elements Source Components Target Assembly
In
Figure 2 Restructuring Components
Fo r
You can move components to different locations in an assembly structure. This is called restructuring. You can restructure and/or reorder multiple components by dragging and dropping them in the model tree. You can reorganize components from one sub-assembly to another, and from the top-level assembly to a sub-assembly, or vice versa. Prior to Creo Parametric, you used the Restructure dialog box, which is still available by clicking Restructure from the Component drop down menu in the ribbon. The drag and drop method of restructuring is easier and less restrictive than the Restructure dialog box. When restructuring components using drag and drop, the system also reorders the components to where you drop in the target sub-assembly. The Restructure dialog box simply places the components at the bottom of the target assembly structure, requiring an additional reorder step. In some cases, showing Features in the model tree makes it easier to select the appropriate drop location.
New Sub-Assemblies
It is common for an assembly to be reorganized during a design process. Often, top-level components are restructured into numerous sub-assemblies.
PT
Restructuring and Reordering Assembly Components
te rn
Figure 3 Reordering Components
al
U se
Show Features in model tree.
Figure 1 Restructured Assembly
nl y
Can restructure and/or reorder multiple components by using the drag-and-drop method.
You may create a new, empty sub-assembly and restructure a number of components into that new sub-assembly or you may use the Move to New Subassembly shortcut to accomplish this in a single operation. After you select components to be restructured, you can right-click, and then select Move to New Subassembly to create a new sub-assembly and automatically restructure the selected components into that sub-assembly. The new sub-assembly is placed at the same level as the selected source components.
Assembly References
The Restructure tool enables you to move components from a top-level assembly into a sub-assembly, from one sub-assembly to another sub-assembly, and from a sub-assembly to a higher level assembly. It is likely that restructuring a component will place the assembly references of the moved component outside of the new assembly level. It is a best practice to always keep assembly references within one level rather than allowing them to travel through multiple levels of an assembly. For example, avoid assembling a component contained in a sub-assembly to references in a higher or lower level assembly. Keep the reference inside that sub-assembly. This practice makes the reference easier to restructure and work with an assembly. Edit the definition of restructured components so that you can verify their references are inside the new sub-assembly and not external to it. If the component uses references external to the current assembly level, the Remove External References dialog box appears and enables you to remove any external references.
You cannot restructure components that are part of a pattern. If an assembly contains multiple copies of the same sub-assembly, restructuring components from that sub-assembly reduces the total number of the restructured component found in the assembly to be only one. All other instances of the component are simply removed from the assembly. You cannot restructure a parent component to come after any child components. If you restructure components with children into a sub-assembly, you are not able to restructure the same component out of the sub-assembly unless you first restructure those children into the same sub-assembly.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
The Restructure tool contains several limitations. Some of the limitations are not related to the tool, but rather to the logical function of assembly references.
In
Restructuring Limitations
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Module 4 | Page 3
PROCEDURE - Restructuring and Reordering Assembly Components

Close Window Erase Not Displayed VALVE.ASM
Component_Operations\Restructure_Reorder Task 1: Restructure components into a sub-assembly.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the model tree, expand COVER.ASM and ARM.ASM. 3. Press CTRL and select both HANDLE.PRT and RING.PRT from the model tree. 4. Drag HANDLE.PRT and RING.PRT and drop them just below ARM.PRT. Task 2:
Fo r
2. Drag the three selected components to just before PLATE.PRT. Move the cursor to the left until VALVE.ASM highlights instead of ARM.ASM to ensure the correct location is selected.
Module 4 | Page 4
PT
In
1. In the model tree, select the first BOLT_HEX.PRT, press CTRL, then select remaining two BOLT_HEX.PRT models.
te rn
al
Simultaneously Restructure and Reorder components out of a sub-assembly.
U se
2012 PTC
nl y
Task 3:
Restructure components into a new sub-assembly.
1. In the model tree, select PLATE.PRT, press CTRL, then select both SCREW.PRT models. 2. Right-click and select Move to New Subassembly. 3. In the Component Create dialog box, type plate in the Name field and click OK. 4. Click Browse in the Creation Options dialog box. 5. In the Open dialog box, double-click MM_KG_SEC_ASSY.ASM. 6. Click OK in the Creation Options dialog box. 7. Right-click and select Default Constraint.
9. In the model tree, expand PLATE.ASM. Task 4:
Remove external references from the new sub-assembly.
2. In the model tree, right-click PLATE.PRT and select Edit Definition.
Fo r
3. Click OK from the Remove External References dialog box. Creo Parametric automatically removes any external reference and enables you to create new assembly constraints within PLATE.ASM. 4. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab, right-click Set15 (User Defined), and select Delete. 5. Right-click in the graphics window and select Default Constraint. 6. In the dashboard, click Complete Component .
2012 PTC
PT
1. In the model tree, right-click PLATE.ASM and select Open. The Remove External References dialog box opens because PLATE.PRT was originally assembled to the VALVE.ASM and still has references to it.
In
te rn
8. In the dashboard, click Complete Component .
al
Module 4 | Page 5
U se
nl y
7. Click Close
8. Edit the definition of PLATE.ASM. 9. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab, right-click Set30 (User Defined), and select Delete. 10. Select the center of the 3D Dragger and drag the sub-assembly out of the top-level assembly. 11. Add Coincident constraints referencing the front face and two holes of SHAFT.PRT. Note that the second holes coincident constraint will automatically change to Oriented. 12. In the dashboard, click Complete Component . Task 5:
1. Collapse the model tree.
2. Reorder the plate assembly by dragging it before the cover assembly.
Fo r
Module 4 | Page 6
PT
In
te rn
Reorder components within an assembly.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Creating Mirrored Assemblies

You can create a mirrored copy of an assembly directly within Creo Parametric.
Mirror Assembly Actions Mirror Geometry Reuse Exclude Dependency Mirrored Merge Feature Figure 1 Mirrored Assembly Model Tree
Creating Mirrored Assemblies
Fo r
You can create a mirrored copy of an assembly directly within Creo Parametric. Click File > Save As > Save a Mirror Assembly to open the Mirror Assembly dialog box. Determine if mirrored assembly geometry should be dependant or independent from the source assembly. If you mirror geometry independently, without selecting the Geometry dependent check box, it does not update when the source model changes. Type a name for the new, mirrored assembly file. Preview the mirrored assembly.
Mirrored Assembly Actions

After defining the mirrored assembly name and geometry dependency, assign mirror action for each component of the assembly from within the Mirror Assembly Components dialog box. You can define the following actions for each component:
PT
In
Figure 4 Mirror Assembly Dialog Box
te rn
Figure 2 Original Assembly
al
U se
Figure 3 Mirrored Assembly
nl y
Mirror Geometry The default option for every component in the original assembly is Mirror Geometry. A mirrored copy of the assembly and every component in the source assembly will be created. You can assign new names to components mirrored with geometry or you can accept the default _MIR suffix added to each file name. Reuse This option reuses the selected component and only mirrors its placement. New models are not created for these components. This is useful for symmetrical models that you can use in both the original and mirrored location. Exclude Use this option to exclude any component from the mirrored assembly.
Dependency Questions
Best Practices
Fo r
Module 4 | Page 8
PT
Only use Mirror Assembly when creating assemblies that are truly mirrors of the original model. The functionality is not intended for creating mirrored assemblies that you later turn into independent assemblies, with little resemblance to the original.
In
te rn
What happens to a component of a mirrored assembly if the original source component is deleted? You can open and reference the mirrored component, however, all mirrored geometry is frozen, as if the model were created without dependency.
al
U se
What happens to the mirrored assembly if the original source assembly is deleted? You can open and reference the mirrored assembly, however, all mirrored geometry is frozen. You can add features but you cannot edit the Mirrored Merge feature.
nl y
2012 PTC
PROCEDURE - Creating Mirrored Assemblies

Close Window Erase Not Displayed MIRROR_ASSY.ASM
Component_Operations\Mirror_Assembly Task 1:
Create a mirrored copy of MIRROR_ASSY.ASM.
3. Under Display, select the Features, Placement folder, and Annotations check boxes. 5. Click File > Save As > Save a Mirror Assembly.
6. Type mirror_assy_mir in the New Name field of the Mirror Assembly dialog box. This is the name of the new mirrored assembly. 7. Select the Preview check box and spin the model to observe the preview of MIRROR_ASSY_MIR.ASM. 8. Click OK from the Mirror Assembly dialog box.
9. In the Mirror Assembly Components dialog box, select the Preview check box to preview the mirrored assembly, as it is configured: Leave STOPPER_COVER.PRT, STOPPER.ASM, and STOPPER_BASE.PRT with the Mirror Geometry option. Accept the default new name suffix _MIR for the mirrored copies. Select Reuse from the Action drop-down list for STOPPER_PLUG.PRT. You only need to mirror the location of these symmetrical components in the new assembly. Select Exclude from the Action drop-down list for STOPPER_SCREW.PRT.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 4 | Page 9
U se
4. Click OK.
nl y
10. Click OK to close the dialog box and create the new assembly. Task 2: Observe the new mirrored assembly and make edits to the original.
2. Click Windows > MIRROR_ASSY.ASM from the Quick Access toolbar to activate it.
4. Expand STOPPER_COVER.PRT, right-click Extrude 1, and select Edit. 5. Edit dimension 50 to 70 and dimension 30 to 50. 6. Click Regenerate
Fo r
7. Click Windows > MIRROR_ASSY_MIR.ASM from the Quick Access toolbar to activate it. to update 8. Click Regenerate the mirrored cover component.
Module 4 | Page 10
PT
In
te rn
3. In the model tree, right-click STOPPER_COVER.PRT,and select Activate.
al
U se
1. In the model tree, expand the node of each component. Notice the following: Each component mirrored with geometry contains a Mirrored Merge feature. The stopper plug does not contain a Mirrored Merge feature because only its placement is mirrored. The screw components are removed.
O
2012 PTC
nl y
You can edit the definition of the Mirrored Merge feature to change dependency between the original and mirrored geometry. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 4 | Page 11
U se
nl y
Creating Mirrored Components

You can create a mirrored part from inside an assembly.
Mirror Part Options Mirror geometry only Mirror geometry with features Mirror placement Dependency Control Figure 1 Assembly
Figure 2 Assembly with Mirrored Part
When creating a mirrored copy of a part, the Mirror part dialog box enables you to define the mirrored copy.
Fo r
Mirror Type:
Mirror geometry only You create a mirrored copy by using the Mirrored Merge feature. No feature structure is included in this mirror type, only the single merge feature. Mirror geometry with features You create a mirrored copy that includes feature structure using this option. You include all features of the original part in this mirrored copy, then as a last feature, you apply the Mirrored Merge feature. Having feature structure in the mirrored part enables you to edit the structure, independent of the original model. Mirror placement Does not create a new mirrored part. You use it to mirror the placement of an assembled part. It is often easier to simply reassemble a component into a mirrored position rather than use Mirror Placement.
PT
Mirror Part Options
from the Component group in the ribbon. This opens the Create Component Create dialog box, in which you: Select Part as the type of model to create. Select Mirror as the model subtype to create. Type a name for the new mirrored part.
In
te rn
You can create a mirrored copy of a part from within an assembly by clicking
al
Creating Mirrored Components
U se
nl y
Geometry dependent Placement dependent
Dependency Control: Geometry dependent Only available when you use Mirror Geometry. This option defines the mirrored geometry as dependent or independent of the original model. Placement dependent Makes placement of the mirrored part dependent or independent of the original model's placement.
What happens to the mirrored part if the original source part is deleted? You can open and reference the mirrored part, however, all mirrored geometry is frozen. You can add features but you cannot edit the Mirrored Merge feature.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 4 | Page 13
U se
Only use Mirror part when you create parts that are truly mirrors of the original model. The functionality is not intended for creating mirrored parts that you later turn into independent parts, with little resemblance to the original.
Best Practices
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Mirrored Components

Close Window Erase Not Displayed MIRROR_COMP. ASM
Component_Operations\Mirror_Component
Task 1:
Create a mirrored copy of BASE_RIGHT.PRT.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. > Tree Filters.... 3. Under Display, select the Features check box and click OK. 4. In the ribbon, click Create from the Component group. 5. In the Component Create dialog box: Click Part and Mirror. Type base_left-1 in the Name field. Click OK. 6. In the Mirror Part dialog box:
Select the Preview check box. Ensure that Mirror geometry only is selected. Ensure that the Geometry dependent check box is selected. Ensure that the Placement dependent check box is cleared. Select BASE_RIGHT.PRT as the Part Reference. Select ASM_RIGHT as the Planar Reference. Click OK.
Fo r
7. In the model tree, expand the BASE_LEFT-1.PRT node. Because Mirror Geometry Only was used, the part's feature structure is a single Mirrored Merge feature.
Module 4 | Page 14
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
2. In the model tree, click Settings
Task 2:
Edit the geometry of BASE_RIGHT.PRT and observe the results.
1. In the model tree, right-click BASE_RIGHT.PRT and select Activate. 2. Edit the radius dimension in Round 2 from 1 to .25. 3. Click Regenerate . 4. In the model tree, right-click MIRROR_COMP.ASM and select Activate. 5. Click Regenerate .
Task 3:
Edit the placement of BASE_RIGHT.PRT and observe the results.
1. In the model tree, right-click BASE_RIGHT.PRT and select Edit. 2. Edit the assembly offset dimension value from 0 to 5. 3. Click Regenerate .
Fo r
Task 4:
1. In the ribbon, click Create
PT
4. In the model tree, right-click BASE_LEFT-1.PRT, select Suppress, and then click OK. Create another mirrored copy of BASE_RIGHT.PRT.
Because Placement Dependent was not used, the placement of BASE_LEFT-1.PRT is independent of BASE_RIGHT.PRT.
In
2. In the Component Create dialog box: Type base_left-2 in the Name field. Click OK.
2012 PTC
te rn
al
Module 4 | Page 15
U se
nl y
Because Geometry Dependent was used, the corresponding round geometry in BASE_LEFT-1.PRT also updates.
3. In the Mirror Part dialog box: Select the Preview check box. Under Mirror Type, select Mirror geometry with features. Select the Placement dependent check box. Select BASE_RIGHT.PRT as the Part Reference. Select ASM_RIGHT as the Planar Reference. Click OK. Task 5:
Edit the geometry and placement of both models. Observe the results.
2. Select Chamfer 3, right-click, select Delete, and click OK. 3. Expand the BASE_RIGHT.PRT node. Notice that Chafer 3 remains in this model. 4. In the model tree, right-click BASE_RIGHT.PRT and select Activate.
PT
5. Edit the radius dimension in Round 2 from .25 to 1. 6. Click Regenerate
Fo r
7. In the model tree, right-click MIRROR_COMP.ASM and select Activate. 8. Click Regenerate .
Because Include all Feature data was used, this mirrored part contains a full feature structure, each independent of the original source model.
Module 4 | Page 16
In
te rn
al
1. In the model tree, expand the BASE_LEFT-2.PRT node.
U se
O
2012 PTC
nl y
9. Select BASE_RIGHT.PRT, right-click, and select Edit. 10. Edit the assembly offset dimension value from 5 to 0. 11. Click Regenerate .
Because Placement Dependent was used, the placement of BASE_LEFT-2.PRT changes with that of BASE_RIGHT.PRT.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 4 | Page 17
U se
nl y
Creating Mirrored Sub-Assemblies

You can create a mirrored sub-assembly from inside an assembly.
Dependency Control Geometry dependent Placement dependent
Creating Mirrored Sub-Assemblies
You can create a mirrored copy of a sub-assembly from within an assembly from the Component group in the ribbon. This opens by clicking Create the Component Create dialog box, in which you: Select Subassembly as the type of model to create. Select Mirror as the model subtype to create. Type a name for the new mirrored part.
Fo r
Mirror Sub-Assembly Options

When creating a mirrored copy of a sub-assembly from within an assembly, you create all mirrored components as geometry-only models. The Include all Feature data option is not available when mirroring a sub-assembly. You can configure Dependency Control as follows: Geometry dependent Defines the mirrored geometry of each component as dependent or independent of the original models. Placement dependent Makes placement of the mirrored components dependent or independent of the original model's placement.
What happens to the mirrored sub-assembly if the original source sub-assembly is deleted?
PT
In
te rn
Figure 1 Assembly
al
Figure 2 With Mirrored Sub-Assembly
U se
nl y
You can open or reference the mirrored assembly. All mirrored geometry is frozen and cannot be edited. Component placement is also frozen; however, you can edit the placement definition for each component.
Best Practices
Only use Mirror Subassembly when you create sub-assemblies that are true mirrors of the original sub-assembly. The functionality is not intended for creating mirrored sub-assemblies that you later turn into independent sub-assemblies, with little resemblance to the original.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 4 | Page 19
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Mirrored Sub-Assemblies

Close Window Erase Not Displayed
Component_Operations\Mirror_Subassembly MIRROR_SUB.ASM Task 1: Create a mirrored copy of STOPPER_BACK.ASM.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. > Tree Filters.... 3. Under Display, select the Features check box and click OK. 4. In the ribbon, click Create from the Component group. 5. In the Component Create dialog box: Click Subassembly and Mirror. Type stopper_front in the Name field. Click OK.
Fo r
6. In the Mirror Subassembly dialog box: Ensure that both Geometry dependent and Placement dependent are selected. Select STOPPER_BACK.ASM as the Assembly Reference. Select ASM_TOP as the Planar Reference.
PT
Select the Preview box. Click OK.
Module 4 | Page 20
In
te rn
check
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Task 2:
Edit geometry of STOPPER_BASE.PRT and observe the results.
1. In the model tree, expand STOPPER_BACK.ASM.
Fo r
2. Expand STOPPER_BASE.PRT, right-click Round 2, and select Edit. 3. Edit the radius dimension from 1 to .25. 4. Click Regenerate .
2012 PTC
PT
Because Geometry Dependent was used, the corresponding round geometry in STOPPER_BASE_MIR.PRT also updates.
In
8. In the model tree, expand the STOPPER_FRONT.ASM and STOPPER_BASE_MIR.PRT nodes. Notice the two Mirrored Merge features.
te rn
al
Module 4 | Page 21
U se
nl y
7. In the Mirror Subassembly Components dialog box, select the check box to preview the mirrored assembly as it is Preview configured: Ensure STOPPER_BASE.PRT is set to Mirror Geometry. A mirrored copy of this model is required in a mirrored assembly. Accept the default new name suffix _MIR for the mirrored copies. Select Reuse from the Action drop-down list for STOPPER_PLUG.PRT and STOPPER_SCREW.PRT. Only the locations of these symmetrical components need to be mirrored in the new assembly. Click OK to close the dialog box and create the new assembly.
Task 3:
Edit the placement of STOPPER_BACK.ASM and observe the results.
1. In the model tree, right-click STOPPER_BACK.ASM and select Edit. 2. Edit the assembly offset dimension value from 0 to 5. 3. Click Regenerate .
Fo r
Module 4 | Page 22
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
Because Placement Dependent was used, the placement of STOPPER_FRONT.ASM changes with that of STOPPER_BACK.ASM.
nl y
Module
5
U se O te rn al
Module 5 | Page 1
Using Assembly Features and Shrinkwrap

Module Overview
In an assembly, you can create assembly datum features such as planes, axes, points, curves, and coordinate systems. You can also create assembly features that remove material such as holes, extrudes, and sweeps. In this module, you focus on creating assembly features to remove material from components of the assembly. Also, in this module you learn about creating and using shrinkwrap features and shrinkwrap models as a way to automatically create lightweight copies of complex parts and assemblies.
Fo r
After completing this module, you will be able to: Understand assembly features. Understand assembly intersections. Create assembly cuts. Create assembly holes. Create shrinkwrap features. Create shrinkwrap models.
2012 PTC
PT
In
Objectives
nl y
Understanding Assembly Features

You can use assembly features to remove material from parts in an assembly without altering the standalone part.
Assembly Features: Remove Material Intersected Components Selected Models Display Level
Figure 1 Assembly Level Cut
In
Creating features in an assembly is very similar to creating features in a part, except there are some restrictions and some additional options. In an assembly, you can create assembly datum features such as planes, axes, points, curves, and coordinate systems. You can also create assembly features that remove material such as holes, extrudes, and sweeps. You cannot create an assembly feature that adds material, only features that remove material. There are two main reasons for using assembly features: Design Intent If the product you have designed has material removed from it after the components have been assembled, then you should do the same in Creo Parametric. One example of this assembly type is a weldment; parts are positioned, welded together, and then holes or other material removal operations are performed on the assembly. Interfering Components In some cases, the assembly of a component such as a force-fit clip or self-tapping hole may remove material, but in
Fo r
Module 5 | Page 2
PT
Understanding Assembly Features
te rn
Figure 2 Assembly Level Hole
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Creo Parametric, there is an interference between the components. You can use an assembly feature as a tool to eliminate that interference. Depending on your situation, Creo Parametrics flexible component functionality may be a better option for handling interfering components.
Intersected Components
By default, assembly features remove material from every component intersected by the feature and are displayed only in the assembly level of the model. The components intersected by the feature can be manually controlled using Advanced Intersection options within the Intersect tab. The display level of the feature can be assigned to the Part Level, Top Level, or to a specific part or assembly.
Be aware that any assembly feature that has its default edited to the Top Level display level can cause performance issues when working with large assemblies. In order for Creo Parametric to have a feature with only the top-level assembly displayed, a duplicate instance is created of every intersected part and one of the assembly features is disabled.
If the display level is edited to Part Level, twin instances are not created and performance is not affected.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
Only use assembly features when they are demanded by the real world assembly process.
Best Practices
In
te rn
Because of this, there are two instances of every intersected part in memory, increasing the memory used by the assembly.
al
U se
O
Module 5 | Page 3
Performance
nl y
Understanding Assembly Feature Intersections

You can control which components an assembly feature intersects and the level at which the feature is displayed.
Intersection Options: Automatic Update Advanced Intersection Intersected Models Display Level Top Level Part Level Sel Level
Understanding Assembly Feature Intersections

When you create a hole or cut in an assembly, you are able to select the parts from which to remove material as well as the level at which the material removal is displayed. The feature can be displayed in the top-level assembly, sub-assembly, or part level.
When you create an assembly level cut or hole, the feature is displayed in all intersected components at the assembly level in which the feature was created. You can further configure the intersected components and display levels using the Intersect tab or the Intersected Comps dialog box. The Intersect tab can be opened from the feature dashboard. You can open the Intersected Comps dialog box by right-clicking the assembly feature and selecting Intersect from the shortcut menu.
Fo r
Automatic Update
When you create an assembly feature such as a cut or hole, the Automatic Update option is enabled by default. Automatic Update ensures the following: All components added to the assembly before the assembly feature are automatically added to the list of intersected components. The display level of the assembly feature is set to Top Level for all intersected components and cannot be edited to Part Level. Components cannot be manually removed from the list of intersected components.
PT
Assembly Feature Intersection Configuration
In
te rn
al
U se
Figure 1 Intersect Tab
nl y
You can right-click any component in the Intersected Models list and select Information to obtain information about the assembly feature. Automatic Update is enabled by default. When Automatic Update is disabled, you can right-click a component and select Remove to manually remove the component from the list of models intersected by the feature. You can right-click and select Intersecting Components Collector to manually add a model to the list of intersected models. Components assembled after the intersecting feature is created are not intersected unless they are also reordered before the feature.
When Automatic Update is disabled, you can toggle Advanced Intersection to switch between basic and advanced intersection modes. In the Intersected Models area, you see each intersected model along with its defined display level. When Advanced Intersection is disabled, the only options available in the shortcut menu when you right-click a component in the list are Remove and Information.
Fo r
Settings
The settings area enables you to define default settings for the intersected components. Settings include the following: Default Display Level Use this drop-down list to set the display level to be applied to components as they are added to the Intersected Models list. Available options are Part Level, Top Level, and Sel Level. If you select the Sel Level option, you are prompted to select the file name of the component where you want the feature displayed. Add Instances Adds a family table instance when inserting an assembly feature in the model. Check Geometry Option Enables you to create a more stable feature when problem geometry is involved. This option is useful when assembly
PT
Add Instance Adds a family table instance of the selected component in the Intersected Models list to the family table instances list. This option is only available when the display level of the selected component is set to Top Level. Part Level Makes the new feature visible wherever this version of the part is used, even outside the current assembly. In addition, you can define the display level by selecting the top-level assembly or a component's file name from the drop-down list. Activate the drop-down list by selecting a component in the Intersected Models list and selecting a file name from the drop-down list in the display column. You can edit Advanced Intersection mode back to Basic mode only when all intersected components have the same display level and no family table instances are intersected by the feature.
In
te rn
al
After you enable Advanced Intersection, the following additional options are available in the shortcut menu when you right-click a component:
U se
nl y
Advanced Intersection
components have differing levels of accuracy when being combined. When the Check Geometry Option check box is used, it applies to the entire feature and not individual intersected components. Show Feature Properties In Sub-Models Sets the default display of the assembly feature as a property of the individual components in the model tree. This option is only available when the Default Display Level is set to Part Level.
Fo r
Module 5 | Page 6
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Creating an Assembly Cut

You can use assembly cuts to remove material from one or more components at the assembly level.
Assembly Cuts: Sketch Direction Intersected Models Display Level
Fo r
You can use assembly cuts to remove material from components at the assembly level. Common conditions for material removal at the assembly level are as follows: Material removed due to assembly procedures such as press or force fit of components. Tooling assemblies in which components are assembled and machining operations are used to remove material from the assembled components. To maintain tolerances in weldment assemblies, material is often removed after the components have been welded together.
Sketch, Depth, and Direction

Like similar part cuts, an assembly cut has a sketch that defines its shape. It also has a defined depth and direction. A sweep feature has trajectories that define its depth and direction.
2012 PTC
PT
You cannot use assembly features to add material to an assembly; however, you can use features such as extrudes and sweeps to remove material from components of an assembly at the assembly level.
Creating an Assembly Cut
In
Figure 1 Three Part Assembly Before Cut
te rn
al
Figure 2 Three Part Assembly After Cut
Module 5 | Page 7
U se
nl y
Intersected Models
By default, assembly cuts remove material from every component in an assembly that is intersected by the feature. You can add or remove components from the Intersected Models list in the Intersect tab or Intersected Comps dialog box.
Display Level
In the Intersected Models list, you can also configure the display level of each intersected part. By default, the display level is set to Top Level. The display level can be set to Part Level, Top Level, or to a specific part or assembly.
Fo r
Module 5 | Page 8
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating an Assembly Cut

Close Window Erase Not Displayed HATCH.ASM
Assembly_Features\Cut Task 1:
Use a revolved feature to remove material from the assembly.
In the model tree, click > Tree Settings Filters. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Features check box and click OK. 1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .
Fo r
6. Sketch a Datum Centerline and a section, as shown in the figure.
2012 PTC
PT
5. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Hidden Line Display types drop-down menu.
In
4. Click Sketch View Setup group.
te rn
from the from the Model
3. In the model tree, select ASM_FRONT as the sketch plane.
al
Module 5 | Page 9
from the Cut 2. Click Revolve & Surface group.
U se
nl y
7. After completing the sketch, click OK . from the 8. Select Shading Model Display types drop-down menu. 9. Click Complete Feature the Revolve dashboard. Task 2: from
Verify the display level of the assembly feature.
1. From the In Graphics toolbar, select the Named Views drop-down menu and select Standard Orientation. In the assembly, the revolve feature was applied to the three HATCH-RING.PRT models.
Fo r
3. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar.
Module 5 | Page 10
PT
As expected, the revolve feature is not displayed at the part level.
In
2. In the model tree, select one of the HATCH-RING.PRT models, right-click, and select Open.
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Task 3:
Remove a component from the Intersected Components list.
1. In the model tree, right-click Revolve 1 and select Intersect. 2. In the Intersected Comps dialog box, do the following: Clear the Automatic Update check box. Right-click the last HATCH-RING model in the list and select Remove. Click OK. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 5 | Page 11
U se
nl y
Creating Assembly Holes

You can use assembly holes when holes intersect components at the assembly level.
Assembly Holes: Intersected Models Display Level
Figure 1 Before Assembly Hole
Creating Assembly Holes
Fo r
Intersected Models
By default, assembly holes remove material from every component in an assembly that is intersected by the feature. You can add or remove components from the Intersected Models list in the Intersect tab or in the Intersected Comps dialog box.
Display Level
In the Intersected Models list, you can also configure the display level of each intersected part. By default, the display level is set to Top Level. The display level can be set to Part Level, Top Level, or to a specific part or assembly.
Module 5 | Page 12
PT
You can use assembly holes to add holes at the assembly level that intersect one or more components of the assembly. Typically, you use assembly holes during the assembly process when you must maintain an assembly tolerance or to maintain the position of components prior to adding the hole.
In
te rn
al
Figure 2 After Assembly Hole
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Assembly Holes

Close Window Erase Not Displayed ASSY_HOLE.ASM
Assembly_Features\Hole Task 1:
Begin creating an assembly hole.
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .
The self-tapping screw enters through a hole in the outer part, then taps into the inner part. This causes an interference condition in the Creo Parametric assembly.
Fo r
6. In the model tree, right-click SCREW_SELF-TAP.PRT and select Suppress. Click OK to confirm.
2012 PTC
PT
5. Double-click the Default All state and click Close in the View Manager dialog box.
In
te rn
4. Double-click the Comb0001 state to activate the combination view.
al
Module 5 | Page 13
3. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar. In the View Manager dialog box, select the All tab.
U se
> Tree Filters. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Suppressed Objects check box. Click OK.
nl y
7. In the ribbon, click Hole the Cut & Surface group.
from
8. Select datum axis A_2 to highlight it. Press CTRL and select the surface shown in the figure. 9. Select the Through All depth option. 10. Edit the diameter to 9. If the feature was completed as is, the hole would intersect both the inner and outer parts. However, this would not match our design intent.
1. Select the Intersect tab from the dashboard. 2. Clear the Automatic Update check box. 3. Select the Advanced Intersection check box.
Fo r
6. In the model tree, right-click SCREW_SELF-TAP.PRT and select Resume. 7. Click View Manager . In the View Manager dialog box, select the All tab.
8. Double-click the Comb0001 state to activate the combination view. The assembly hole now intersects the inner part.
Module 5 | Page 14
PT
Because the screw is suppressed, it is automatically removed from the Intersected Models list. You can return a part to the list using the Add Intersected Models button.
In
4. Right-click OUTER from the Intersected Models list and select Remove.
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
Task 2:
Determine which model the assembly hole will intersect.
nl y
9. In the model tree, select INNER.PRT, right-click, and select Open.
As expected, the hole does not appear at the part level.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 5 | Page 15
U se
nl y
Creating a Shrinkwrap Feature

The shrinkwrap feature automatically selects and copies surface data from a part or assembly into a feature.
Shrinkwrap Feature: References Options Subset Surface subset collection methods Outer Shell Auto collect all solid surfaces Manual collection
Figure 1 Detailed Assembly Model
Creating a Shrinkwrap Feature
Fo r
Based on a specified collection method, the shrinkwrap feature automatically collects surfaces from the source assembly and copies them associatively into the shrinkwrap feature. Because the surfaces are copied associatively, the shrinkwrap feature updates when edits are made to the assembly. Using the References and Options tab, you can refine the automatic collection of surfaces to be included in the shrinkwrap feature.
Uses of a Shrinkwrap Feature

There are three main uses for a shrinkwrap feature, which are as follows: To create a lightweight version of a complex part or assembly that you can use as a reference or packaging model. You can also turn a model containing a shrinkwrap feature in to an envelope model and substitute it in a simplified rep. To create an associative model that you can use to share geometry with vendors or customers while eliminating any proprietary detail you do not want to share.
PT
Shrinkwrap features contain a collection of associatively copied surfaces and datums that represent the exterior shape of a referenced part or assembly.
In
Figure 2 Auto Collect All Solid Surfaces
te rn
al
Figure 3 Outer Shell
U se
nl y
To create a lightweight simplified rep by creating a shrinkwrap feature in an assembly and then excluding everything in the assembly except the shrinkwrap feature.
Subset
You can click Subset in the Shrinkwrap dashboard to open the Shrinkwrap Comps dialog box. In this dialog box, you can select components to be considered or ignored during the shrinkwrap creation process.
Surface Subset Collection Methods
Always include surfaces Select any geometry in the source model that should always be included in the shrinkwrap feature. Never include surfaces Select any geometry in the source model that should never be included in the shrinkwrap feature. Chain Select curves and surface geometry adjacent to selected solid edges. Include Datums Select any datum features that should be included in the shrinkwrap feature.
Fo r
Options
In the Shrinkwrap dashboard, you can open the Options tab where you can control the automatic selection of geometry in the source model. The following options are only available when using the Outer Shell collection method: Subset Options Subset options configure one of two creation options: Shrinkwrap then Exclude Shrinkwrap the entire source model then exclude geometry from models that you have selected to never include. Exclude then Shrinkwrap Exclude models that you have selected to never include, then shrinkwrap the model.
Quality Level You can edit the relative quality of the shrinkwrap feature creation process to a value between 1 and 10. High quality levels increase processing time, file size, and the level of detail included in the shrinkwrap feature.
PT
In
te rn
In the Shrinkwrap dashboard, you can open the References tab to specify geometry to always be included or excluded from the shrinkwrap feature. You can select from the following:
al
References
U se
Outer Shell Collect surfaces that represent the outer shell of the assembly. Autocollect all solid surfaces Collect all solid surfaces in the assembly. The results of this surface collection method can be converted to a solid shrinkwrap feature. Manual collection You can manually select any surfaces you want included in the shrinkwrap feature.
nl y
In the Shrinkwrap dashboard, you can select from three surface subset collection methods to be used in creation of the shrinkwrap feature. The three methods are as follows:
Attributes You can select attributes that control the automatic selection of shrinkwrap geometry. Attributes include the following: Auto Hole Filling Fill all holes or cuts that intersect a single surface. Include Quilts Select quilts that should always be included in the shrinkwrap feature. Ignore Small Surfaces Exclude surfaces that are smaller than a specified percentage of the model's overall size. Dependent By default, the shrinkwrap feature is a dependent of the source components. If you edit the size or position of the original component, the shrinkwrap feature updates accordingly. When using the Auto collect all solid surfaces collection method, you can select the Solidify resulting geometry check box in order to create solid geometry from the collected surfaces.
Fo r
Module 5 | Page 18
PT
The Assembly Context dashboard icon defines the shrinkwrap feature in the context of the assembly. The External icon enables you to create the feature without referencing the assembly.
In
Reference Path
te rn
By default, all inner contours of a selected contour surface are filled. By clearing the check box next to a selected contour surface, you can manually remove geometry from the fill operation. For example, if you select a fill contour surface that includes five holes to fill, you can manually select one or more of the holes to not be filled.
al
U se
The Fill contours option enables you to explicitly select surface geometry where you want any intersecting hole or cavity to be filled or excluded from the shrinkwrap feature. You can use this option when using any of the three collection methods. A black curve is placed in the shrinkwrap feature to represent contours that have been removed.
nl y
2012 PTC
PROCEDURE - Creating a Shrinkwrap Feature

Close Window Erase Not Displayed SW_FEATURE.ASM
Assembly_Features\Shrinkwrap_Feature Task 1: Create a new part in the assembly.
3. Click Create
to create a new part in the assembly.
4. Select Part and Solid if necessary, then click OK in the Component Create dialog box. 5. Click Browse in the Creation Options dialog box, and double-click MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT, then click OK. 6. Right-click in the graphics window and select Default Constraint. 7. Click Complete Component Task 2: .
1. In the model tree, right-click PRT0001.PRT and select Activate.
3. In the dashboard, click the Subset button.
5. Click OK to close the Shrinkwrap Comps component chooser.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
4. In the Shrinkwrap Comps component chooser, select the first listing of BOLT_518.PRT, press SHIFT, right-click CONNECTING_ROD.PRT, and select Ignore. The selected components are ignored during the creation of the shrinkwrap feature.
In
2. Click Shrinkwrap
te rn
Add a shrinkwrap feature using the Outer Shell collection method.
from the Get Data group.
al
U se
nl y
2. In the model tree, click Settings > Tree Filters. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Features check box and click OK.
Module 5 | Page 19
6. In the dashboard, select the References tab. Notice that you can select geometry to always include or never include. You can also select curve chains and datum features to include in the feature. Keep the default settings. 7. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. Select the Exclude then Shrinkwrap radio button. Edit the Quality Level to 5 and click OK if necessary. Select the Auto Hole Filling check box. Select the Ignore Small Surfaces check box and edit the Threshold value to 2. 8. Click Complete Feature Task 3: .
1. In the model tree, right-click PRT0001.PRT and select Open. 2. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Wireframe from the Model Display types drop-down list. Notice that the feature consists of surfaces copied from geometry in the assembly.
from the list and click Close Quick Access toolbar.
Fo r
Task 4:
1. In the model tree, right-click PRT0001.PRT and select Activate. 2. Click Shrinkwrap from the Get Data group.
3. In the dashboard, click the Subset button. 4. In the Shrinkwrap Comps component chooser, select the first listing of BOLT_518.PRT, press SHIFT, right-click CONNECTING_ROD.PRT, and select Ignore. 5. Click OK to close the Shrinkwrap Comps component chooser.
Module 5 | Page 20
PT
Add a shrinkwrap feature using Auto collect all solid surfaces.
from the 4. Select Shading Model Display types drop-down
In
3. In the model tree, right-click Shrinkwrap id 24 and select Delete. Click OK.
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
Open PRT0001.PRT and observe the shrinkwrap feature.
nl y
6. In the dashboard, click Outer Shell and select Autocollect all solid surfaces from the collection drop-down list. Click Yes in the Exclude Internal Components Window. 7. On the Options tab, click Solidify resulting geometry. 8. Click Complete Feature .
2. From the In Graphics toolbar, click View Manager and select the Sections tab, if necessary. Click New > Planar. Type A and press ENTER. In the model tree, select datum plane RIGHT. Click Complete Feature . 3. Click Close
Fo r
Task 6:
1. In the model tree, right-click CYLINDER.PRT and select Activate. 2. Expand CYLINDER.PRT. Right-click BOSSES and select Edit. 3. Edit the dimension value from 51 . to 71 and click Regenerate
2012 PTC
PT
Cross-section A shows the shrinkwrap feature is solid.
Edit the source models and update the shrinkwrap feature.
In
te rn
al
Module 5 | Page 21
U se
1. In the model tree, right-click PRT0001.PRT and select Open.
Task 5:
Create a cross-section to verify that the shrinkwrap feature is solid.
nl y
4. In the model tree, right-click PRT0001.PRT and select Open. 5. In the model tree, right-click the shrinkwrap feature and click Update Shrinkwrap. Click Yes in the Warning dialog box. The length of the bosses in the shrinkwrap feature have updated according to the cylinder model change.
Fo r
Module 5 | Page 22
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Creating a Shrinkwrap Model

Use the shrinkwrap feature to automatically create a lightweight copy of a model.
Shrinkwrap Model Methods: Surface Subset Faceted Solid Merged Solid
Figure 1 Surface Subset
Figure 2 Merged Solid
te rn
Creating a Shrinkwrap Model
To create a shrinkwrap model, open the model you want to shrinkwrap, click File > Save A Copy. In the Save A Copy dialog box, select the Shrinkwrap file type.
Fo r
In the Create Shrinkwrap dialog box, you are then presented with various creation methods and geometry definition options for creating the model.
Uses of a Shrinkwrap Model

There are two main uses for a shrinkwrap model: To create a simplified model used to share geometry with vendors or customers while eliminating any proprietary detail you do not want to share. To create a lightweight version of a complex part or assembly to be used as a reference or packaging model.
Creation Methods
You can use the following three creation methods when creating a shrinkwrap model:
PT
A shrinkwrap model is an automatically created, non-associative, simplified copy of a selected part or assembly.
In
al
Figure 3 Faceted Solid
U se
nl y
Surface Subset A collection of surfaces and datum features that represents the external geometry of a referenced model. The surface subset is the fastest shrinkwrap method and results in the smallest model size, because it is comprised of only surface geometry. Faceted Solid An approximate, faceted solid model that represents all external surfaces with additional surfaces added to bridge gaps and complete the solid. Merged Solid A very accurate solid representation of a source assembly. Components from the source assembly are merged together into a single part that represents the solid geometry in all collected components.
Special Handling
You can adjust the special handling options to control the automatic creation of the shrinkwrap model geometry. Fill holes If selected, this shrinkwrap attribute fills all holes or cuts that intersect a single surface. Ignore Skeletons If selected, geometry from skeleton models are not included in the shrinkwrap model. Ignore quilts If selected, surface quilts are not included in the shrinkwrap model. Ignore small surfaces Only available using the Surface Subset method, this attribute enables you to exclude surfaces smaller than a percentage of the model's overall size. Assign Mass Properties Enables you to assign the full assembly's mass property values to the simplified shrinkwrap model.
Fo r
Miscellaneous Creation Options

Include Datum References Used to select datum features from the source that you want copied into the shrinkwrap model. Preview Options For a Surface Subset shrinkwrap, you can edit the preview geometry color from real colors to gray-orange colors. Gray identifies the included surfaces while orange identifies the excluded surfaces. Additional Surfaces For a Surface Subset shrinkwrap, you can select geometry to include with automatically selected surfaces. Faceted Solid Options For a Faceted Solid, select an Output Format of Part, LW Part, STL, or VRML. Additional Components For a Merged Solid, select additional models to include in the set of automatically selected models being merged.
Module 5 | Page 24
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
You can edit the relative quality of the shrinkwrap model creation process to a value between 1 and 10. High quality levels increase processing time, file size, and the level of detail included in the shrinkwrap model.
nl y
Quality Level
2012 PTC
Creation Method Comparison Chart

Surface Subset Source Model Geometry Type Quality Level Part or Assembly Surface Only Higher quality increases the number of surfaces included in the Shrinkwrap. Source Colors Retained Yes Faceted Solid Part or Assembly Tessellated Solid Higher quality increases the accuracy of the representation. Merged Solid Assembly Only Accurate Solid Higher quality increases number of components included in the merge operation. Source Colors Retained No
Ignore Small Surfs
No
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 5 | Page 25
U se
Colors
Colors Not Retained
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating a Shrinkwrap Model

Close Window Erase Not Displayed SW_MODEL.ASM
Assembly_Features\Shrinkwrap_Model Task 1: Save a Surface Subset shrinkwrap model.
Fo r
4. In the Create Shrinkwrap dialog box, do the following: Clear the Fill holes check box. Select the Assign Mass Properties check box. Select the Gray-Orange radio button. Click Preview. Notice the excluded surfaces highlighted in orange. Edit the Quality Level to 4 and click OK in the Warning dialog box, if necessary. Click Preview.
Notice that because the Quality Level increased, the second preview took longer to create and fewer surfaces were excluded. 5. Click OK to create a shrinkwrap model named SW_MODEL_SW0001. PRT. 6. Click Accept Value to accept the default relative accuracy value.
Module 5 | Page 26
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
3. In the Save a Copy dialog box, select Shrinkwrap from the Type drop-down list and click OK.
nl y
2. Click File > Save As > Save a Copy.
Task 2:
Save a Faceted Solid model.
1. In the Create Shrinkwrap dialog box, do the following: Select the Faceted Solid check box. Click Preview. Edit the Quality Level to 8. Click Preview. Because the Quality Level increased, the second preview took longer to create and contained much more detail.
2. Click OK to create a shrinkwrap model named SW_MODEL_SW0002. PRT. Task 3: Save a Merged Solid model.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
2. Click OK to create a shrinkwrap model named SW_MODEL_SW0003. PRT.
In
te rn
1. In the Create Shrinkwrap dialog box, do the following: Select the Merged Solid check box. Edit the Quality Level to 6. Click Preview.
al
Module 5 | Page 27
U se
nl y
Task 4:
Compare the three shrinkwrap models.
1. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar. Select SW_COMPARE.ASM and click Open. 2. From the In Graphics toolbar, select No Hidden Display types drop-down list. from the Model
The Surface Subset model is on the left, the Faceted Solid model is in the middle, and the Merged Solid model is on the right.
Fo r
Module 5 | Page 28
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Summarizing Shrinkwrap Features and Models

The following is a summary of shrinkwrap feature and shrinkwrap model functionality.
Figure 1 Surface Subset, Faceted Solid, and Merged Solid Shrinkwraps
Shrinkwrap Comparison Table
Fo r
Associativity
PT
General Description
In
Shrinkwrap Feature
te rn
This reference table summarizes the functionality found in both shrinkwrap features and shrinkwrap models.
al
Summarizing Shrinkwrap Features and Models
Automated tool for copying surface data from a part or assembly into a feature. The feature can be created internal or external to an assembly. Feature can be dependent or independent of the source model.
Geometry Type Mass Properties
Surface Subset Only
Cannot assign mass properties from a source model.
2012 PTC
U se
Shrinkwrap Model Automated method for creating a simplified copy of a part or assembly using Save A Copy.
No associativity to the source model. Shrinkwrap model does not update if the source model changes. Surface Subset, Faceted Solid, or Merged Solid Can assign mass properties from a source model.
O
Module 5 | Page 29
nl y
Function 1
Create a dependent lightweight representation of a complex part or assembly. Can be converted to an envelope and substituted in a simplified rep.
Create an independent lightweight representation of a complex part or assembly. Because it is not associated to the source model, you should not use it as an envelope. To share simplified surface, tessellated, or accurate solid models with a vendor or customer while eliminating any proprietary details you do not want to share.
Function 2
Typically, your vendors prefer to have solid models rather than surface-only models. Function 3
Benefits
PT
The ability to be dependent or independent of the source model.
In
Create a lightweight simplified rep by creating a shrinkwrap feature in the assembly and then excluding everything but the shrinkwrap feature from the Simplified Rep.
te rn
Fo r
Module 5 | Page 30
al
The ability to create surface or solid geometry. Greater control of geometry creation.
2012 PTC
U se
To share a simplified surface-only model with a vendor or customer while eliminating any proprietary details you do not want to share.
nl y
Module
6
U se O te rn al
Module 6 | Page 1
Replacing Components in an Assembly

Module Overview
Creo Parametric provides a variety of tools for replacing one component in an assembly with another. Some tools automatically replace components based on preexisting relationships between the components. Some tools require you to first create that relationship between the components, before enabling you to replace unrelated components. In this module, you learn how to replace components in an assembly, using all of the tools available in the Replace dialog box.
Objectives
Fo r
After completing this module, you will be able to: Replace family table components in an assembly. Replace reference models in an assembly. Replace components using the By Copy option. Replace unrelated components in an assembly. Replace unrelated components using the Reference Pairing table. Replace components using an interchange assembly.
2012 PTC
PT
In
nl y
Understanding Component Replace

Creo Parametric provides many options for efficiently replacing one component with another in an assembly.
Replace By: Family Table Interchange Reference Model Layout By Copy Unrelated
Figure 1 Reference Pairing
Fo r
To open the Replace dialog box, click Edit > Replace from the main menu. You can also preselect the component you want to replace, then right-click and select Replace. The Replace dialog box remains open, enabling you to select and replace multiple components. When you are finished replacing components, click OK to close the dialog box.
Replace and References

Typically, you assemble a component using references between its geometry and other components in the assembly. If you replace a component in an assembly with a new component, you need to specify the geometry that the new component should reference for placement. For example, you replace a bolt that was assembled to a hole in a block with another bolt. You must specify in Creo Parametric the exact geometry for the new bolt to use as the insert reference or Creo Parametric does not properly position the bolt. This same rule applies to the assembly that contains the components. If you replace the block with a new block containing many holes, Creo Parametric does not automatically insert the bolt in the correct hole.
PT
The Component Replace tool enables you to exchange one component with another. Tools within the Replace dialog box provide multiple methods for replacing selected components and managing references between them.
In
Understanding Component Replace
te rn
Figure 2 With Original Component
al
Figure 3 With Replaced Component
U se
nl y
In the Replace dialog box, you can select a variety of Replace By tools that enable you to replace components of different types and requirements. Some of the tools automatically replace a component and all references, while others enable you to identify and pair references between the old and new component. Replacing and substituting components are two different actions. Substitution exchanges one component for another. You perform substitution in the context of a simplified representation.
Benefits of using Replace By Tools

The Replace By tools enable you to exchange components in an assembly, while transferring the original component's parent/child relationships to the new component. By transferring relationships to the new component, you can significantly reduce the amount of rework that may be required in future assemblies or drawings. Family Table You can automatically replace any component that is part of a family table with another instance of that family table. Interchange You can automatically replace a member of a functional interchange assembly with other members of the same interchange assembly. You can use interchange assemblies to replace components in multiple assemblies. Reference Model You can automatically replace components related by inheritance, merge, or shrinkwrap features. Layout You can automatically replace components that are declared to a layout that contains global datums that define assembly intent. By Copy You can copy a current component and replace it with the new component, while maintaining all original assembly relationships. Unrelated You can exchange components that are not related to each other.
Fo r
Best Practices
When replacing components, avoid disrupting any future applications by using the method that best enables you to transfer references between the new and old model.
2012 PTC
PT
The component that you select determines the Replace By tools that appear in the Replace dialog box. For example, the Family Table tool is not available if you are replacing a component that is not a member of a family table.
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Module 6 | Page 3
Replacing Components using Family Table

You can automatically replace components that are members of a family with other members of the table.
Replace By: Family Table Family Table Members Assembly References
Figure 1 Family Table Component List
Figure 2 Original Instance
Replacing Components using Family Table
. In the In the Replace dialog box, click Family Table, then click Open Family Table dialog box, select a component to replace the current instance.
Fo r
Assembly References
When you automatically replace a component, the children of the original component may not be able to reference the new component. For example, an instance of a family table may not have the same number of holes as the original instance. In this situation, after replacing the instance, you need to edit the assembly definition to account for fewer holes.
Best Practices
Replacing components by family table is a fast and easy way to swap components in and out of an assembly. This is a common method when working with standard hardware libraries that are often created with family tables.
Module 6 | Page 4
PT
You can automatically replace any component that is part of a family table with another instance of that family table.
In
te rn
al
Figure 3 Replaced Instance
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Replacing Components using Family Table

Component_Operations\Replace_Family-Table CLAMP_RFT.ASM Task 1: Replace BOLT_10-15_RFT.PRT with BOLT_10-36_RFT.PRT using Family Table.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the model tree, select the first instance of BOLT_10-15_RFT.PRT. 3. Right-click and select Replace. 4. In the Replace dialog box, select Family Table.
7. Click OK in the Replace dialog box.
Fo r
8. In the model tree, press CTRL and select the three remaining BOLT_10-15_RFT.PRT components. 9. Right-click and select Replace. 10. In the Replace dialog box, select Family Table.
2012 PTC
PT
6. Select BOLT_10-36_RFT.PRT and then click OK in the Family Tree dialog box.
In
5. Click Open dialog box.
in the Replace
te rn
al
Module 6 | Page 5
U se
nl y
11. Click Open dialog box.
in the Replace
12. Select BOLT_10-36_RFT.PRT and then click OK in the Family Tree dialog box. 13. Click OK in the Replace dialog box.
Fo r
Module 6 | Page 6
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Replacing Components using Reference Model

You can replace components related by inheritance, merge, or shrinkwrap using the Reference Model method.
Replace By: Reference Model Inheritance Feature Merge Feature Shrinkwrap Feature
Figure 1 Cast Model
Replacing Components using Reference Model
In
You can automatically replace any components related by inheritance, merge, or shrinkwrap features using the Reference Model method. In the Replace dialog box, click Reference Model, then click Open Open dialog box, select a related reference model. . In the
Fo r
Assembly References
When you automatically replace a component, the children of the original component may not be able to reference the new component. After the new component has been placed, you may need to edit the assembly to account for new or missing assembly references.
Best Practices
Replacing components by reference model is a fast and easy way to exchange components in and out of an assembly. This is a common method when working with standard hardware libraries created using the Inheritance feature. Also, you can use the Inheritance or Merge feature when creating various machined versions of a cast model. You can then exchange any model referencing the cast model in and out of the assembly.
2012 PTC
PT
te rn
al
U se
Figure 2 Machined Model
Module 6 | Page 7
nl y
PROCEDURE - Replacing Components using Reference Model

Component_Operations\Replace_Reference-Model RM_MACH.PRT Task 1: Replace the cast part with the machined part.
5. In the graphics area, select RM_CAST.PRT.
Fo r
6. Right-click and select Replace.
7. In the Replace dialog box, ensure Reference Model is selected. 8. Click Open dialog box. in the Replace
9. Click RM_MACH.PRT and click Open. 10. Click OK in the Replace dialog box.
Module 6 | Page 8
PT
4. Select VALVE_RM.ASM, and click Open.
In
3. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar.
te rn
The base model referenced by the External Merge feature is RM_CAST.PRT. Geometry from the cast part is merged into the machined part where additional features have been applied. Because these models reference each other, they can be replaced in an assembly using the Reference Model option.
al
U se
O
2012 PTC
2. In the model tree, right-click the External Merge feature and select Open Base.
nl y
The cast model is replaced by the machined model, yet all related components remain assembled. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 6 | Page 9
U se
nl y
Replacing Components using By Copy

You can replace components by copying a selected component in an assembly.
Replace By: By Copy New Copy Name
Figure 1 Copy to be Replaced
Replacing Components using By Copy
This method is similar to saving a copy in part mode. However, in this case, you are saving a copy in the context of an assembly. Select one or more components to replace. Right-click, and select Replace. In the Replace dialog box, click By Copy. Edit the name of the new component in the Name field in the New Copy section of the dialog box. If you select multiple components, type a suffix to add to the current name of each component.
Because this component is an exact copy of the original model, all models referencing the original model now reference the new component.
Fo r
Best Practices
This is a great tool for evaluating design changes to selected components in an assembly.
Module 6 | Page 10
PT
Assembly References
In
This new copied model is unrelated to the original model. Changes made to the new component do not affect the original.
te rn
al
U se
With this method of replacement, you can replace a component with a copy by creating a new component based on a copy of the existing model.
O
2012 PTC
nl y
PROCEDURE - Replacing Components using By Copy

Close Window Erase Not Displayed CLAMP_BYCOPY.ASM
Component_Operations\Replace_Copy Task 1:
Replace the clamp base using the By Copy method.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the model tree, click Settings > Tree Filters. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Features check box. 3. Click OK. 4. In the model tree, select CLAMP_BASE_BYCOPY.PRT. Right-click and select Replace. 5. In the Replace dialog box, select By Copy. 6. Edit the Name to clamp_base_2. 7. Click OK to complete the replacement. Task 2:
Edit the new CLAMP_BASE_2.PRT.
2. In the model tree, expand the CLAMP_BASE_2.PRT node.
Fo r
3. Select Sketch 1. Right-click and select Edit.
4. Edit the dimension 80 to 120 and the dimension 40 to 100. 5. Click Regenerate .
6. In the model tree, select CLAMP_BYCOPY.ASM. Right-click and select Activate.
2012 PTC
PT
1. In the model tree, select CLAMP_BASE_2.PRT. Right-click and select Activate.
In
te rn
al
Module 6 | Page 11
U se
nl y
7. Click Open , select CLAMP_BASE_BYCOPY.PRT, and click Open.
The size of CLAMP_BASE_BYCOPY.PRT has not changed. Only the new CLAMP_BASE_2.PRT has increased in size. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
Module 6 | Page 12
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Replacing Unrelated Components

You can replace any component with another using the Unrelated Component tool.
Replace By: Unrelated Assembly References Edit Ref Table Reassemble Reference Evaluation
Replacing Unrelated Components
In the Replace dialog box, click Unrelated Component. In the Open dialog box, select the new component to swap into the assembly.
Fo r
Assembly References
The components you are swapping have no relationship to each other; you must place the new component and redefine the placement of any component referencing the component that was replaced. There are two methods for handling the new assembly references: Reference Pairing You can click the Edit Ref Table button to create a pairing table. The table contains the placement references from the component that you are replacing and enables you to pair them with geometry in the new component. By identifying and pairing the new assembly references prior to replacing the original model, you avoid assembly regeneration failures. You can pair references manually or automatically using the Evaluation tool.
PT
You can replace unrelated components by using the Unrelated Component method.
You can replace parts with sub-assemblies and sub-assemblies with parts using the Unrelated Component functionality.
In
Figure 1 Assembled Component to Replace
te rn
al
Figure 2 Unrelated Component
U se
nl y
You can save the pairing table information with the assembly and use it to return the original component to the assembly. Reassemble If you do not assign reference tags in the Reference Pairing Table, Creo Parametric automatically opens the assembly dashboard, enabling you to select references to place the new, unrelated component. Then, you should use Edit Definition or Edit References to edit the placement of any components that have references to the replaced model.
Reference Evaluation
In the Reference Pairing Table, you can click Evaluate to automatically pair reference tags in both models, using a set of evaluation rules. By default, all rules are applied. However, the Evaluation Rules button enables you to configure which rules to apply. These evaluation rules include the following:
Figure 3 Reference Pairing Table Same ID (and Type) Is the most powerful evaluation rule. This option pairs all component references that are of the same feature ID and type. This rule enables the easy replacement of an unrelated component that was created by copying the original model. This evaluation also automatically pairs datum references that originated in the same template model. Component Interfaces Compares component interfaces from two components and pairs interfaces with the same name. This option is efficient when the same name is given to similar interfaces configured in each component. Same Name (and Type) Pairs all component references that are of the same name and type. This option depends on careful planning since you must consistently name geometric features throughout your projects. Same History Searches for copied data-sharing features from the existing component in the incoming component. Such features are then automatically used as pairs. Same Parameters Searches for all references with the given parameter name, type, and value, and automatically pairs those that match.
Fo r
Best Practices
Replacing components using the Unrelated Component method is useful because it does not require the swapped components to have a predefined relationship, such as Reference Model, Family Table, Interchange Assembly
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
and so on. The Reference Pairing tool enables you to swap unrelated components and avoid rework to downstream assemblies, drawings, and other applications.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 6 | Page 15
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Replacing Unrelated Components

Close Window Erase Not Displayed REPL_UNREL.ASM
Component_Operations\Replace_Unrelated
Task 1:
Replace an unrelated component using the Edit Ref Table.
4. Click Open
5. Select CLAMP_BASE_CIR.PRT and click Open. 6. Click Edit Ref Table. 7. In the Reference Pairing Table dialog box, do the following: Click Evaluate. Select each tag and observe the paired geometry highlighted in the display window. Click OK. 8. Click OK in the Replace dialog box.
Fo r
Because CLAMP_BASE_CIR.PRT was originally a copy of CLAMP_BASE_UNREL.PRT, Creo Parametric automatically evaluated and paired their common assembly references. Manually pair references to replace an unrelated component.
Task 2:
1. In the model tree, right-click CLAMP_SHAFT_UNREL.PRT and select Replace. 2. In the Replace dialog box, select Unrelated Component. 3. Click Open under Select New Component.
4. Select IMPORTED_SHAFT.PRT and click Open.
Module 6 | Page 16
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
3. In the Replace dialog box, select Unrelated Component.
nl y
2. In the model tree, right-click CLAMP_BASE_UNREL.PRT and select Replace.
5. In the Replace dialog box, click Edit Ref Table. 6. In the Reference Pairing Table dialog box, click Evaluate. 7. Notice that only TAG_3 was automatically paired as datum plane RIGHT. IMPORTED_SHAFT.PRT is not a copy of CLAMP_SHAFT_ UNREL.PRT. The only reference that can be automatically paired is datum plane RIGHT. 8. Click TAG_0. 9. Select a surface in IMPORTED_SHAFT.PRT that corresponds to the highlighted TAG_0 reference. 10. Click TAG_1. 11. Select a surface in IMPORTED_SHAFT.PRT that corresponds to the highlighted TAG_1 reference.
12. Click TAG_2.
15. In the Replace dialog box, click OK.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
14. Click OK.
If you had not manually paired missing references, the assembly dashboard would have opened, enabling you to redefine the component's placement. You would also be required to edit the definition of any components assembled to the replaced part.
13. Select a surface in IMPORTED_SHAFT.PRT that corresponds to the highlighted TAG_2 reference.
In
te rn
al
Module 6 | Page 17
U se
nl y
Understanding Interchange Assemblies

Interchange assemblies enable the automatic replacement and substitution of components.
Interchange Component Types: Functional Simplify Component Component
Figure 1 Pairing References of a Functional Component
Fo r
Functional interchange components replace functional components in an assembly. Simplify interchange components substitute for components in a simplified representation.
Interchange Assembly Rules
The following rules apply to interchange assemblies: The first component in an interchange assembly is, by default, a functional component. Subsequent components can be functional or simplify components. You can assemble simplify components to packaged functional components. You cannot assemble functional components to packaged functional components. You can only reference a functional component when creating or assembling a simplify component. You cannot reference a simplify component when creating or assembling another simplify component.
PT
There are two types of interchange components that you can add to an interchange assembly:
In
You can use interchange assemblies to manage components that are frequently substituted for one another. In the interchange assembly, you can predefine and save paired references that are used to assemble the components within design assemblies. Creating an interchange assembly is useful when you have a number of components that are frequently replaced with one another in many assemblies throughout your enterprise.
te rn
al
Understanding Interchange Assemblies
U se
nl y
You can use the same component twice in an interchange assembly, once as a functional component and once as a simplify component. You cannot add another instance of a component if the generic instance is already in the interchange. You cannot add the generic instance of a component if an instance is already in the interchange. Interchange assemblies are identified by the .ASM extension; however, you cannot assemble an interchange assembly in a regular design assembly.
Best Practices
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 6 | Page 19
U se
Maintaining the interchange assembly is logical if you have a group of components that are frequently replaced or substituted throughout your enterprise. If the component is not replaced or substituted frequently, an interchange assembly may be unnecessary. It is important to ensure that maintaining the interchange assembly throughout your products lifecycle provides value to your organization.
nl y
A component that is replaced or substituted using an interchange assembly becomes a child of that interchange assembly. Because of this, the interchange assembly is a required reference of that assembled component.
Replacing using a Functional Interchange Assembly

You can use functional interchange assemblies to define and save component replacement references.
Create Reference Tag Features Reference Tag Tool Based on Assembly Using Evaluate
Figure 1 Paired Reference Tag
Figure 2 Selected Reference Tag
You can create an interchange assembly by clicking New . Then from the New dialog box, select Assembly as the type and Interchange as the subtype.
Fo r
Functional Components
Any component that you want to automatically replace is added to the interchange assembly as a functional component. You can add functional components by clicking Functional from the Component group in the ribbon. or Create
Reference Tags
Reference tags are features that identify and pair assembly references that are common to each component in an interchange assembly. Each reference tag contains a set of references selected from components in the interchange assembly. These common references are considered equivalent when any of these components are replaced by one another in a design assembly. Each reference tag feature contains one common set of assembly references.
PT
A functional interchange assembly is a special assembly subtype that defines automatic replacement for a set of components.
In
Replacing using a Functional Interchange Assembly
te rn
al
U se
nl y
To create reference tags, click Reference Tag in the Reference Pairing group in the ribbon, press CTRL, and select the appropriate reference from each component.
Reference Pairing Table

The Reference Pairing table contains tools to automatically create and pair reference tags. To open the Reference Pairing Table dialog box, click Ref in the Reference Pairing group in the ribbon. Once the Pairing Table dialog box opens, there are two workflows used to create and pair reference tags.
Reference tags are automatically created based on how the active component is referenced in a selected assembly. Active Component Select the active component. This is the component you want to replace. in the Reference Create Tags based on assembly Click Open Pairing Table dialog box, and select the assembly that you want to use to identify the required reference tags. Create Required Tags Click Create Required Tags in the Reference Pairing Table dialog box. A tag is created for each reference used by the active component. Pairing Click the first tag in the list, press CTRL, and select corresponding geometry from each component in the interchange assembly. Repeat the process for each reference tag in the list. Click OK when all reference tags have been paired.
Create and Pair Reference Tags Based on Evaluation Rules
Active Component Select the active component. Components to Pair Activate the Components to Pair field of the dialog box, press CTRL, and select each component for which you want to create reference tags. Evaluate In the Evaluate drop-down list, select Evaluate and Create Tags. This automatically populates the tag list with every datum feature found in the active model. If the rules can find equivalent features in the selected to pair components, they are automatically paired. If no pairs are found, you can manually pair or remove the tags. Click OK when you are finished. You can toggle the display of these rules on and off by clicking the Evaluation Rules button.
Fo r
Best Practices
A component that you replace using an interchange assembly becomes a child of that interchange assembly. Therefore, the interchange assembly is a required reference of that assembled component. Maintaining the interchange assembly is logical if you have a group of components that are frequently replaced or substituted throughout your
PT
Reference tags for datum type geometry are automatically created and paired based on a set of rules.
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Create and Pair Reference Tags Based on an Assembly
enterprise. If the component is not replaced or substituted frequently, an interchange assembly may be unnecessary. It is important to ensure that maintaining the interchange assembly throughout your products lifecycle provides value to your organization.
Fo r
Module 6 | Page 22
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Replacing using a Functional Interchange Assembly

Close Window Erase Not Displayed CARB.ASM
Component_Operations\Interchange_Functional Task 1: Create a functional interchange assembly.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. from the Quick Access toolbar. 2. Click New Select Assembly as the type and Interchange as the subtype. Edit the Name to ic_carb and click OK. from the Component group.
3. In the ribbon, select the Model tab, if necessary. Click Functional 4. In the Open dialog box, select CARB.PRT and click Open. 5. Click Functional .
6. In the Open dialog box, select CARB2.PRT and click Open. 7. Click Complete Component
Fo r
10. In the Reference Pairing Table . dialog box, click Open 11. In the Open dialog box, select CARB.ASM and click Open.
12. If required, move the models and resize the Reference Pairing Table dialog box so that you have access to both. 13. In the Reference Pairing Table dialog box, click Create Required Tags and then click the newly generated tag, TAG_0. 14. In the graphics window, select the reference in CARB2.PRT that corresponds to the TAG_0 reference displayed in CARB.PRT.
2012 PTC
PT
9. Select CARB.PRT as the Active Component.
In
8. Click Ref Pairing Table from the Reference Pairing group.
te rn
.
al
U se
nl y
Module 6 | Page 23
15. In the Reference Pairing Table dialog box, click TAG_1. 16. In the graphics window, select the reference in CARB2.PRT that corresponds to the TAG_1 reference. 17. In the Reference Pairing Table dialog box, click TAG_2.
20. In the graphics window, select the reference in CARB2.PRT that corresponds to the TAG_3 reference. 21. Click OK. Task 2:
Use the interchange assembly to replace CARB.PRT with CARB2.PRT.
3. In the Replace dialog box, click
Fo r
Open
4. Expand the IC_CARB interface, select CARB2.PRT and click OK. 5. Click OK in the Replace dialog box.
Module 6 | Page 24
PT
2. In the model tree, right-click CARB.PRT and select Replace. .
1. Click Windows from the Quick Access toolbar and select CARB.ASM to activate it.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
19. In the Reference Pairing Table dialog box, click TAG_3.
nl y
18. In the graphics window, select the reference in CARB2.PRT that corresponds to the TAG_2 reference.
Module
7
U se O nl y
Module 7 | Page 1
Understanding the Basics of Simplified Reps

Module Overview
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: Retrieve assembly subsets. Understand standard simplified reps. Understand custom simplified reps. Use lightweight graphics representations. Use graphics simplified reps to reduce the memory requirements of an assembly. Use geometry simplified reps to reduce the memory requirements of an assembly. Exclude components from assemblies using simplified reps. Define simplified reps using the component chooser. Create default envelope simplified reps. Create and use simplified reps of part models. Open simplified reps directly from the Open dialog box.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
You can reduce the level of geometry detail in complex assemblies by using simplified representations. You can control which sub-assemblies and components Creo Parametric opens with the top-level assembly. You can exclude certain components, as well as substitute complex components with simpler representations.
al
Retrieving Assembly Subsets

A subset of assembly components can be retrieved.
Retrieve Subset Faster retrieval of large assemblies. Retrieval Customization dialog box. Apply places a subset in the main graphics window. Can save a simplified representation in the main assembly.
Fo r
Retrieving Assembly Subsets

When opening an assembly, you can retrieve a subset of assembly components. In the Open dialog box, select an assembly and click Open Subset. This enables faster and smarter retrieval of large assemblies.
Retrieval Customization Dialog Box

Objects selected in the Retrieval Customization dialog box, shown in Figure 1, are set to Master Rep, but can be configured as required. The Basic View keeps selection simple and enables you to decide which components to retrieve or not to retrieve. The Advanced View enables you to customize component retrieval further by selecting from the following list of retrieval methods: Master Rep Exclude
PT
Figure 1 Retrieval Customization Dialog Box
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Geometry Rep Graphics Rep Light Graphics Rep Boundary Box Rep Other simplified representation settings
For large assemblies, you may find it beneficial to search for components rather than to browse in the tree structure to select components of interest. You can supply simple text searches in the Search text box. Objects highlight as you type matching names. Additionally, you can access the Search Tool dialog box or select components directly in the main window.
Remove External Components Invert Selection
Once you have established the retrieval options for the components, you can click Apply to place a subset in the main graphics window. Then, you have the option to save a simplified representation based on the retrieval settings.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
This does not replace the Open Rep option, which is still found in the Open drop-down menu.
Include Selected Components Select components inside a 2-D rectangle. Select components intersected by a 2-D rectangle.
In
te rn
Remove Internal Components
al
Remove By Size Uses a scroll bar to set the size. Toggles between remove small components and remove large components. Selects a model to set the size.
U se
The Retrieval Customization dialog box has its own In Graphics toolbar and several available options, including the following:
nl y
Model Rules can also be used to determine which objects to select. You can evaluate and edit model rules in the Retrieval Customization dialog box.
Module 7 | Page 3
PROCEDURE - Retrieving Assembly Subsets

Close Window Erase Not Displayed NO FILES OPEN
Advanced_Assembly\Subset Task 1:
Retrieve an assembly subset by selection. .
1. Click Open
2. Select ENGINE.ASM. (Do NOT double-click it.) 3. Click Open Subset. 4. Click Advanced View. 5. Expand the CRANK.ASM node. 6. Select CRANKSHAFT.PRT, and then select the check box. 7. Select PISTON.ASM, and then select the check box. 8. Select CONNECTING_ROD. PRT, and then select the check box. 9. The tree display should appear as shown.
10. Orient the model in the preview window.
Fo r
11. Click OK > Yes and press ENTER to accept the default simplified rep name. 12. Disable all Datum Display types.
Module 7 | Page 4
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
13. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar. If necessary, select the Simp Rep tab, and notice Rep0001 is created. 14. Click Close. 15. Click Close .
17. Click OK. Task 2:
1. Click Open
2. Select ENGINE.ASM. (Do NOT double-click it.) 3. Click Open Subset. 4. Click Basic View, if necessary.
5. Click Remove By Size in the Retrieval Customization dialog box.
Fo r
7. Drag the slider slightly to the left until the Cylinder is de-selected.
2012 PTC
PT
In
6. Drag the slider to the right until the cylinder highlights.
te rn
al
Module 7 | Page 5
U se
Retrieve an assembly subset by geometric size.
nl y
16. Click Erase Not Displayed from the Home tab in the ribbon. Notice that only the retrieved subset *.PRT models are erased along with the *.ASM files.
8. Click Remove Large Components .
9. Right-click and select Retrieve.
10. Click OK.
Fo r
11. Click Close
12. Click Erase Not Displayed . Notice only the retrieved subset *.PRT models are erased along with the *.ASM files. 13. Click OK. This completes the procedure.
Module 7 | Page 6
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Understanding Standard Simplified Reps

Simplified reps enable you to manage memory usage of large parts and assemblies.
Standard Simplified Reps: Default Rep Master Rep Boundary Box Rep Default Envelope Rep Symbolic Rep Geometry Rep Graphics Rep
Figure 2 Graphics Rep Display
Understanding Standard Simplified Reps

For every Creo Parametric part and assembly, you find a list of standard simplified reps in the view manager. You can use these standard reps to help manage the amount of system memory required to open and work with large parts and assemblies.
Fo r
The standard simplified rep types found in Creo Parametric are as follows:
Default Rep The default rep and the master rep are initially identical, however: The default rep type is only available in assemblies. You can edit and save a default rep. You can temporarily edit, but not save, other standard representations. If you edit and save the default rep, the assembly always opens in the default rep state. Master Rep The master rep is the default representation of a Creo Parametric model. It contains all geometry and features. Boundary Box Rep The boundary box rep contains no geometry or features, only a wireframe bounding box identifying the overall size and location of the assembly. The boundary box rep is best used to simplify the representation of a selected part or sub-assembly within another simplified rep.
PT
For example, using boundary box, default envelope, symbolic, graphics or geometry reps increases system performance, because these reps require less memory to open and manipulate than a master rep.
In
te rn
al
Figure 3 Master Rep Dimensions
U se
Figure 1 Geometry Rep Measurement
nl y
Opening and Activating Simplified Reps
Fo r
Things to Know About Simplified Reps

When working with simplified reps, you should know the following: Updating Geometry and Graphics Reps Geometry and graphics reps of edited models do not update until you save the edited model. Graphics Display Control The save_model_display CONFIG.pro option controls the level of display saved in a model. The default shading_lod option is typically satisfactory for most designs; however, some organizations may want to investigate the performance and file sizes provided by the other options. shading_lod The default setting. This option saves all levels of detail according to the setting in the View Performance dialog box. wireframe Saves only wireframe information for the graphics display of all models. shading_high Saves a high level of shaded detail with the model. shading_low Saves a low level of shaded detail with the model.
PT
Simply editing a master rep to a graphics rep does not reduce the amount of memory used by the system. Models from the master rep stay in session until you erase them by clicking File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
In
In the view manager, you can toggle between different representations by double-clicking their name.
te rn
You can open an existing simplified representation by clicking the Open Rep button at the bottom of the Open dialog box. This enables you to open large models without first opening the master rep.
al
U se
Default Envelope Rep The default envelope rep enables you to represent an assembly with an envelope part. A pre-existing envelope can be selected as the default envelope. If no envelope exists, Creo Parametric enables you to create a default envelope on-the-fly. Symbolic Rep The symbolic rep enables you to simplify an assembly by representing it as a datum point and symbol. It contains no geometry or features. Geometry Rep A geometry rep contains a model's full, solid geometric definition, but without feature content. Compared with graphics reps, geometry reps require slightly more memory and time to retrieve. You can use geometry reps to perform the following tasks: Obtain measurement information. Calculate mass properties. Reference other assembly components. Graphics Rep This representation type contains no geometry or features. This rep contains only display information. The graphics rep requires minimal memory to open and view. You cannot modify or reference graphics reps; you can only view them.
nl y
Understanding Custom Simplified Reps

You can create custom simplified reps for better performance, visualization, and workability.
Simplified Rep Status Types: Exclude Master Rep Assembly Only Geometry Graphics Boundary Box Default Envelope Symbolic User Defined
Figure 2 Simplified Content
te rn
Understanding Custom Simplified Reps
Fo r
Simplified reps are configured views of a part or assembly. You should never use them to create a new assembly or part numbers. Customized simplified reps provide the following two primary benefits: Increase system performance by managing the number or complexity of components in an assembly. Simplified representations accomplish this by removing unnecessary components or features from a model, thus reducing the memory required to open and work with the model. Customize a model for a specific task. You can use simplified representations to remove components that are unnecessary or not desired while performing specific tasks. For example, you can use the simplified rep functionality to easily exclude components from view that are obstructing your view or access to other components.
Simplified Rep Status

Every simplified rep has a default status applied to its top level. For example, a geometry rep has the Geometry Only status applied to its top level. The graphics rep has the Graphics Only status applied to its top level.
PT
To create a new customized simplified rep, you can apply a status to selected components of an assembly. You can configure these custom reps to improve performance or to make working with an assembly easier.
In
al
Figure 3 Reduced Clutter
U se
Figure 1 User Defined Type
nl y
You can create custom simplified reps by editing the default status applied to the top level of a rep, along with the status applied to individual components in the rep. For example, you can create a rep with a default status of Graphics Only where only one part in the rep has the Master Rep status applied to it. You can apply various statuses to create custom simplified reps. You can apply a status from the following list to the top level, default condition, and/or to individual components of an assembly. Exclude Select components to exclude from the assembly without regard for parent-child relationships. Memory usage is significantly reduced by excluding components from an assembly and then erasing those components from memory. Master Rep Select components to represent in their default status. All geometry and features are present. Assembly Only Select assemblies without any components to represent. Only assembly features are present. Geometry Select components to represent as solid geometry containing no feature information. You can calculate measurement, mass property, and interference information with geometry reps. You can edit and reference component placement. Geometry reps require less system memory than master reps. Graphics Select components to represent graphically only. Components are visible, but you cannot measure or calculate mass properties from these representations. Graphics reps require less system memory than geometry reps. Boundary Box Select components to represent by their boundary box representation. Boundary box reps require even less system memory than graphics reps. Default Envelope Select a sub-assembly to substitute with a simplified envelope part that represents the assembly. Symbolic Select components to represent by a symbolic representation. A 2-D symbol must be previously defined to replace the components. Like boundary box reps, symbolic reps require less system memory than graphics reps. User Defined Select components to substitute with a custom simplified rep of that component. You cannot substitute standard simplified reps.
Fo r
Creating and Editing Custom Simplified Reps

Use the following select and set status workflow to either create or edit custom simplified reps: Select a component(s) in the model tree or graphics window to which you wish to apply a status. Right-click and select Set Representation to to apply a status to the selected component(s). This action marks the current rep as modified. Save the modified simplified rep in the view manager. Once saved, you can toggle between various simplified reps. To revert to the representation as it was prior to your edits, double-click the modified rep rather than save it.
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Simplified Reps Description

The description for each custom simplified rep can be edited to describe the content of the rep. When you cursor over a simplified rep name in the view manager or in the Open Rep tool, the description is displayed as a tool tip. A description makes it easier for other users of your assembly to understand what is contained in the simplified rep you created and how it may be useful to them. Use one of the following two methods to open the Description dialog box and edit the description of a custom simplified rep: Right-click the representations name in the view manager and select Description. Select a rep in the view manager and then click Edit > Description from the view manager. In the Description dialog box, you can edit the default description manually and then close the dialog box. You can also erase the existing description, insert a description from a text file, and save the description to a text file.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 7 | Page 11
U se
nl y
Lightweight Graphics Representations

Lightweight graphics representations use less system resources than standard graphics representations.
Sub-assembly boundary boxes. Can drag components.
PT
In
Figure 2 Default Light Graphics Rep
Fo r
Lightweight Graphics Representations

Lightweight graphics representations use less system resources than standard graphics representations. You can open a light graphics representation by clicking Open > Open Light Graphics in the Open dialog box. Each sub-assembly is retrieved as a Boundary Box Rep, but can be toggled to a Graphics Rep to make it visible in the graphics area. Components in a light graphics rep can also be dragged.
Module 7 | Page 12
te rn
Figure 3 Configured Light Graphics Rep
al
2012 PTC
U se
Figure 1 Light Graphics Rep Model Tree
nl y
PROCEDURE - Lightweight Graphics Representations

Close Window Erase Not Displayed NO FILES OPEN
Advanced_Assembly\Lightweight_Graphics Task 1:
Open a lightweight geometry representation. .
1. Click Open
5. Select Set Representation to > Boundary Box.
Fo r
6. Right-click CRANK.ASM in the model tree. 7. Select Set Representation to > Graphics.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
4. Right-click CYLINDER.PRT in the model tree.
al
Module 7 | Page 13
U se
3. Click Open > Open Light Graphics. Notice that sub-assembly graphics are not shown.
nl y
2. Select ENGINE.ASM. (Do NOT double-click it.)
8. Right-click PISTON.ASM in the model tree. 9. Select Set Representation to > Graphics.
Fo r
Module 7 | Page 14
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
10. Press CTRL+ALT and drag the flywheel.
nl y
Using Graphics Simplified Reps

Use standard lightweight graphics simplified reps to manage memory usage of large assemblies.
Graphics Representations: Lightweight, minimal memory requirements Boundary box highlighting On Demand Backup references
Fo r
On Demand
By default, On Demand functionality is enabled in Creo Parametric. On Demand functionality automatically brings required models into session based on actions applied to a model. For example, if you attempt to measure an edge of a model in a graphics rep, Creo Parametric automatically opens the master rep of that model so you can measure it. When you finish the measure operation, you can erase the master rep from memory.
Backup References
You have the option to save placement references of a component in the assembly. This enables component placement updates in the absence
PT
Graphics reps are easily identified in an assembly. When you move your cursor over a component with its status set to graphics rep, the component highlights with a wireframe bounding box representing the overall size of the model. Simply activating a graphics rep does not reduce the amount of memory the system uses. Models stay in session until you erase them by clicking File > Manage Session > Erase Unused Model Reps.
In
The graphics rep requires minimal memory, enabling you to easily open and view large models.
te rn
A graphics representation contains no geometry or part features, only a model's display information. Because a graphics representation contains only graphical information, you can only use it for model display.
al
Using Graphics Simplified Reps
U se
Figure 1 Bounding Box of Graphics Rep
nl y
of component geometry. This also enhances the use of graphics reps by minimizing the need to retrieve geometry representations of components that contain placements effected by a design change. You can store placement references for selected models by selecting Backup References from the shortcut menu. You can also store placement references while placing or redefining a component. The auto_backup_new_placemnt_refs CONFIG.pro option enables automatic placement reference storage of newly placed components. The On Demand assembly settings option Retrieve backed up references must be disabled so that references are retrieved from the assembly and not the assembled component. The graphics simplified reps functionality is most beneficial for very large assemblies. There is a negligible benefit to using it with small or average size assemblies.
Fo r
Module 7 | Page 16
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Using Graphics Simplified Reps

Close Window Erase Not Displayed GRAPHICS.ASM
Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Graphics
Task 1:
Compare the models that are in session when using the master rep and the graphics rep of the assembly.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Click Open . In the Open dialog box, select In Session . 3. Notice that every component of the assembly is opened in session memory. Click Cancel to close the dialog box.
6. Click Close in the INFORMATION WINDOW. 7. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar.
8. In the view manager, double-click Graphics Rep to activate the rep and then click Close. 9. Cursor over the assembly in the graphics area. Notice that as you pass over each component, it is identified as a graphics rep by the highlighted bounding box.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
5. Scroll in the INFORMATION WINDOW and notice that each component is listed as being open in session.
al
4. Click File > Manage Session > Object List .
U se
Module 7 | Page 17
nl y
10. Click File > Manage Session > Object List. 11. Scroll in the INFORMATION WINDOW and notice that both a master rep and graphics rep of each part are listed as open in session. 12. Click Close in the INFORMATION WINDOW. 13. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Unused Model Reps to remove all models not currently displayed from session. 14. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed to remove all models not currently displayed from session.
17. Click Cancel to close the dialog box. 18. Click File > Manage Session > Object List.
19. Scroll in the INFORMATION WINDOW and notice that each part is listed as open in session as a graphics rep. 20. Click Close in the INFORMATION WINDOW. When the graphics rep is in session, none of the part models are in session. This is the reason that graphics reps are useful for improving system performance when working with large assemblies. Task 2: Enable On Demand to bring required models into session.
Fo r
from the 2. Click Length Measure group drop-down menu, select the frame, and then select the edge of the frame, as shown in the figure.
3. Click Open . In the Open dialog box, select In Session .
4. Notice that FRAME.PRT is now in session. Click Cancel to close the dialog box. 5. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Unused Model Reps to remove FRAME.PRT from session. A graphics rep is a lightweight, graphical representation of a model. It does not contain the geometry required to analyze the model.
Module 7 | Page 18
PT
1. In the ribbon, select the Analysis tab.
In
te rn
al
U se
16. Click Open
. In the Open dialog box, select In Session
nl y
.
2012 PTC
15. The Erase Not Displayed dialog box lists all models not included in the graphics rep. Click OK to confirm their removal.
Task 3:
Create a simplified rep containing both master and graphics reps.
1. In the model tree, right-click ENGINE.ASM and click Set Representation to > Master. 2. Cursor over the assembly and notice that the engine parts are no longer highlighted by the graphics rep bounding box.
3. Click View Manager
6. Click Close from the view manager.
7. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed to remove all models not currently displayed from session.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 7 | Page 19
U se
5. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified Rep field to master_engine and click OK.
4. Right-click Graphics Rep(+) and select Save.
nl y
Using Geometry Simplified Reps

Use standard geometry simplified reps to manage memory usage of large assemblies.
Geometry Representations: Lightweight, reduced memory requirements Full solid geometric definition No part features or dimensions On Demand
Figure 1 Interference Check with Geometry Reps
A geometry rep requires less memory to open than a full featured master rep, but more memory than a graphics rep.
Fo r
Simply activating a graphic or geometry rep does not reduce the amount of memory the system uses. Models stay in session until you erase them by clicking File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
On Demand
By default, On Demand functionality is enabled in Creo Parametric. On Demand functionality automatically brings required models into session based on actions applied to a model. For example, if you attempt to edit a dimension in a geometry rep, Creo Parametric automatically opens the master rep of that model so you can access its features. When you finish the edit, you can erase the master rep from memory.
Module 7 | Page 20
PT
Obtain measurement information. Calculate mass properties. Reference other assembly components.
In
A geometry representation contains a model's full solid geometric definition, but without feature content. Because a geometry representation contains solid geometry, you can use it to do the following:
te rn
Using Geometry Simplified Reps
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Using Geometry Simplified Reps

Close Window Erase Not Displayed GEOMETRY.ASM
Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Geometry
Task 1:
Edit the Master_Engine rep so that the blower assembly components are geometry reps.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the model tree, click Settings > Tree Filters. 3. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Features check box. 4. Click OK. 5. Click File > Manage Session > Object List from the main menu. 6. Scroll in the INFORMATION WINDOW and notice that each component is listed as open in session.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
7. Click Close in the INFORMATION WINDOW.
te rn
al
Module 7 | Page 21
U se
nl y
from the In Graphics toolbar.
9. In the view manager, double-click Master_Engine to activate the rep. 10. In the model tree, right-click BLOWER.ASM and click Set Representation to > Geometry. 11. Right-click Master_Engine(+) and select Save. 12. Click OK in the Save Display Elements dialog box. 13. Click Close from the view manager. 15. Scroll in the INFORMATION WINDOW and notice that a mixture of master, graphics, and geometry reps are now open in session. 14. Click File > Manage Session > Object List.
Task 2:
Check for interferences in the Master_Engine rep.
Fo r
in the Global 3. Click Preview Interference dialog box.
4. Click Show All to see the interferences between each of the BOLT_5.PRT models and FLANGE.PRT. to close the dialog box.
5. Click Cancel
Geometry reps contain the geometry required to perform analyses such as interference checks and measurements. They do not contain the features and dimensions required to edit the model.
Module 7 | Page 22
PT
2. Click Global Interference from the Inspect Geometry group.
1. In the ribbon, select the Analysis tab.
In
te rn
17. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed to remove all models not currently in the rep.
al
16. Click Close in the INFORMATION WINDOW.
U se
The IMPELLER_HOUSING and BOLT_5 are in session as master, geometry, and graphics reps. This means that in addition to the master rep using system memory, the geometry and graphics reps are using additional memory. For this reason, it is important to remove unnecessary reps from memory as often as possible.
nl y
2012 PTC
Task 3:
Edit the flange part to eliminate the interferences.
1. In the model tree, expand BLOWER.ASM, and then expand FLANGE.PRT. Because the status of FLANGE.PRT is currently set to geometry rep, there are no features shown when you expand the model. 2. Right-click FLANGE.PRT and select Activate.
4. Edit the diameter value 2.8 to 3 . and click Regenerate
5. Right-click GEOMETRY.ASM and select Activate.
In
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
8. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
7. Double-click Master_Engine(+) to reset it and click Close.
te rn
al
Module 7 | Page 23
U se
3. In the model tree, expand Pattern 1 of Hole 1. Right-click any of the Hole 1 features and select Edit.
nl y
On Demand functionality opens the master rep of FLANGE.PRT when it is activated, giving you access to the part's features.
Excluding Components using Simplified Reps

You can exclude components from a simplified rep for better assembly performance and accessibility.
Exclude Components: Without regard for parent-child relationships. For better performance. For better access.
Layers or Hide You can hide components from display using the Hide or Layer tool; however, hidden components remain in system memory. This method does not improve system performance of large assemblies. Suppress or Delete You can remove components from regeneration and system memory using suppress and delete; however, this method requires that you manage parent-child relationships. Exclude You can exclude components from regeneration and system memory without regard for parent-child relationships. Also, you can toggle between saved simplified reps without having to recreate each representation. Simply excluding a component does not reduce the amount of memory used by the system. Models stay in session until you erase them by clicking File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
Fo r
Module 7 | Page 24
PT
Removing components from an assembly using the Exclude status in a simplified rep provides benefits not found using other methods:
In
You can remove components from a simplified rep using the Exclude status. You can exclude components to reduce memory usage or provide better access when working in an assembly.
te rn
Excluding Components using Simplified Reps
al
Figure 1 Master Rep
U se
Figure 2 With Excluded Components
O
2012 PTC
nl y
PROCEDURE - Excluding Components using Simplified Reps

Close Window Erase Not Displayed EXCLUDE.ASM
Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Exclude Task 1:
Exclude components from the assembly to create a simplified rep.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the graphics area, select the red IMPELLER_HOUSING.PRT. 3. Right-click and select Select Parent. 4. Right-click and select Set Representation to > Exclude to exclude the BLOWER.ASM. 5. In the model tree, press CTRL and select the eight BOLT_8.PRT models. 6. In the ribbon, click Manage Views > Set Representation to > Exclude .
Fo r
8. In the list of simplified reps, notice that the Master Rep is now followed by a plus (+) symbol, indicating that it has been modified. 9. Right-click and select Save.
10. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified Rep field to no_blower and click OK. 11. In the Names list, right-click No_Blower and select Description. 12. Click Erase 13. Click Insert 14. Click Save Text . and double-click no_blower.txt. .
15. In the Names list of the view manager, cursor over No_Blower. Notice the tool tip displaying the description you just added.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
from
al
Module 7 | Page 25
U se
nl y
Task 2:
Create a new simplified rep by editing the current simplified rep.
1. With the view manager still open, expand ENGINE.ASM in the model tree. 2. Press CTRL and select CARBURETOR.PRT, MUFFLER.PRT, and ENGINE_COVER.PRT.
5. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified Rep field to No_Blower_2 and click OK. 6. Click Close to close the view manager.
8. Click OK to erase the listed components from system memory.
Fo r
1. Select ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT, right-click and select Set Representation to > Exclude. 2. Click View Manager the In Graphics toolbar. from
3. In the view manager, double-click No_Blower_2(+) to restore the modified rep to its previous condition. You can temporarily modify and then restore any simplified rep to its saved condition by double-clicking the modified rep name. Temporarily excluding components from display in this manner is a useful tool for working with assemblies. This completes the procedure.
Module 7 | Page 26
PT
Task 3:
Edit and then restore the current active simplified rep.
In
te rn
The Erase Not Displayed dialog box lists each component excluded from the simplified rep. To improve system performance, you can erase these components from system memory.
al
U se
4. Right-click in the view manager and select Save.
The No_Blower simplified rep is now followed by a plus (+) symbol, indicating that it has been modified.
nl y
2012 PTC
3. Right-click and select Set Representation to > Exclude.
Defining Simplified Reps Using the Component Chooser

Use the component chooser to preview and select components when defining a simplified rep.
Component Chooser: Structure Tree Preview Window Derived Status Default Exclude
Fo r
PT
Defining Simplified Reps Using the Component Chooser

When you select New or Redefine on the Simp Rep tab of the view manager, the component chooser opens. Use the dynamic preview and selection tools in the component chooser to create and edit simplified reps.
The Component Chooser Dialog Box

The component chooser contains a variety of tools used to configure a simplified rep: Model Tree On the left side of the chooser, you view a tree structure. From the tree, you can multi-select components and apply statuses to them. As statuses are edited in the structure tree, the preview window updates accordingly. Apply statuses to selected models using the following methods:
In
Figure 1 Component Chooser
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Fo r
Derived Status
A Derived status indicates that a component's status is a driven status. The derived status changes when the driving components status is edited. For example, if components of an assembly are set to Master Rep (Derived) and the status of the assembly is edited to Graphics Rep, all components in the assembly change to Graphics Rep (Derived).
Default Status
When you create a new simplified rep, the default simplified rep rule is Exclude. This simplifies large assembly management by eliminating unintentional retrieval of a new representation where all parts are set to Master Rep. You can easily edit the default rule of a new simplified representation by selecting the top assembly in the component chooser and editing its status to Master Rep.
Module 7 | Page 28
PT
drop-down menu in the model graphics section, From the Settings you can toggle Auto update preview off for better performance when working with very large assemblies. Layout Edit the position of the preview window to be below, above, right, or left of the structure tree.
In
From the Settings drop-down menu in the model Settings tree section, you can expand or collapse the model tree. You can also edit the column display in the structure tree and save the structure tree to a text file. Show The preview window defaults to Show: Active components in the window. You can set the preview to Show: Inactive or Show: Envelopes.
te rn
al
Click a component status and select a new status from the drop-down list. Right-click a component name and select a status from the Representation shortcut menu. Use the check box next to each component in the tree to easily toggle statuses or reset the rep. An assembly with components of different statuses is considered mixed and is indicated by a filled check box. Model Graphics On the right side of the chooser, you view the preview window. As edits are made to the status of models in the tree, the model displayed in the preview window is updated accordingly. If you select a component in the preview window, that component is also selected in the structure tree. Undo and Redo The undo and redo buttons enable you to undo and redo statuses applied in the current session of the component chooser. Find The Find field provides a quick and easy way to search for and select components in the structure tree. For example, if you type bolt, every component starting with the word bolt is selected in the structure tree. Select From the Select menu, you can use Advanced Search or the Select in main window tool to select components in the main window. Model Rules From the Model Rules menu, you can click Evaluate Rules or Edit Rules to view rules associated with the rep.
U se
nl y
2012 PTC
PROCEDURE - Defining Simplified Reps Using the Component Chooser

Close Window Erase Not Displayed CHOOSER.ASM
Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Chooser
Task 1:
Create a simplified rep with a default status of Exclude.
2. From the In Graphics toolbar, click View Manager . Click New on the Simp Rep tab. 3. Edit the name to inside and press ENTER.
4. In the Edit:INSIDE component chooser, do the following: Click Settings and click Expand All. In the structure tree, double-click the check boxes next to CRANKSHAFT.PRT, PISTON_ASSY.ASM, ENGINE_COVER.PRT, and IMPELLER.PRT to set their status to Master Rep. Click OK to complete the rep. As you edit the status of components to Master Rep, each displays in the preview window of the component chooser.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
The default status at the top level of a new simplified rep is Exclude. Every component in the rep has an Exclude (Derived) status applied.
U se
O
Module 7 | Page 29
nl y
Task 2:
Create a simplified rep with a default status of Master Rep.
1. In the view manager, click New. 2. Edit the name to outside and press ENTER. 3. In the Edit:OUTSIDE component chooser, do the following: Click Settings and click Expand All. In the model tree section of the dialog box, right-click CHOOSER.ASM and click Set Representation to > Master. This sets the default status of the entire assembly to Master Rep. In the Find field of the dialog box, type bolt. Right-click any of the highlighted bolt parts and click Set Representation to > Exclude. Right-click CRANKSHAFT.PRT and select Set Representation to > Exclude. Set the status of PISTON_ASSY.ASM to Exclude by double-clicking the check box next to its name. Set the status of IMPELLER.PRT to Exclude using either the right-click or double-click methods. Click OK to complete the rep. The parts in PISTON_ASSY.ASM have their status set to Exclude (Derived), indicating that they derive their status from PISTON_ASSY.ASM.
Fo r
Task 3:
1. In the view manager, right-click Outside and select Redefine. 2. In the component chooser, click Select > Select in main window.
Module 7 | Page 30
PT
Redefine the Outside rep to exclude the carburetor model.
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
2012 PTC
3. Select CARBURETOR.PRT, as shown in the figure. 4. Click OK in the Select dialog box. 5. Notice that CARBURETOR.PRT is now highlighted in the structure tree. Right-click CARBURETOR.PRT and click Set Representation to > Exclude.
The default status of the rep and all derived models is now Graphics Rep.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
9. Click OK to complete the rep.
te rn
al
Module 7 | Page 31
8. Right-click CHOOSER.ASM and click Set Representation to > Graphics.
U se
7. The ATTENTION dialog box confirms whether or not you want to change the status of all sub-models to Master Rep. Click Cancel.
6. At the top of the structure tree, select the check box next to CHOOSER.ASM.
nl y
Creating a Default Envelope Simplified Rep

Use the Default Envelope status to create a simplified rep that represents an assembly with a single part.
Default Envelope Rep Default Envelope Status Automated Process Envelope Part Shrinkwrap Feature
te rn

Each assembly contains a standard simplified rep named Default Envelope Rep. You can create a default envelope part that this standard rep uses to represent the entire assembly. There is also a Default Envelope status that can be applied to any assembly. The Default Envelope status enables you to create custom reps that use a selected default envelope part. The geometry in the default envelope part is created using an associative shrinkwrap feature. You control the subset of components that contribute to the shrinkwrap feature, as well as the detail of geometry collected. When closed volumes of surface geometry are collected, the shrinkwrap feature can be made solid. Then, you can substitute the simplified rep containing envelope geometry into higher level assemblies.
Fo r
Bottom-Up or Top-Down Creation

Default envelope simplified reps can be created using either a bottom-up or top-down process: Bottom-Up Create the default envelope simplified rep in a sub-assembly before you use it in a higher level assembly. In the higher level assembly, you substitute the fully defined sub-assembly with the default envelope simplified rep.
PT
In
Figure 1 Complete Assembly
al
Figure 2 Single Solid Envelope Part
U se
nl y
Top-Down If no default envelope simplified rep exists for a selected sub-assembly, you can easily create a default envelope simplified rep when needed in a higher level assembly. The default envelope simplified rep of the sub-assembly is created in the sub-assembly and simultaneously used in the higher level assembly.

You create a default envelope simplified rep by activating an undefined standard Default Envelope Rep in the view manager or by setting the default status of an assembly to Default Envelope.
If the assembly does not contain a default envelope, an automated process begins to create the simplified rep, the default envelope, and the shrinkwrap feature used to define the geometry of the envelope. In the Default envelope dialog box, type the following: Envelope Name - The name of the envelope. Part Name - The name of the part contained in the envelope. Common Name - You can type a common name for the part if desired. Select the template model to be used to create the envelope part. Use the shrinkwrap feature to collect geometry that defines geometry of the envelope. At this stage in the process, you determine the subset of models the shrinkwrap feature will reference when collecting geometry. You can also define the amount of geometry detail to be collected using settings on the Options tab. Close the Simplified Rep component chooser to complete the creation of the rep.
Fo r
Best Practices
Typically, the intent of a simplified rep is to reduce the amount of data in session, yet still provide the detail required for completing tasks using the assembly. Limiting the subset of components referenced by the shrinkwrap feature is one way to reduce memory requirements of an envelope part. Also, a solid shrinkwrap feature requires more memory than the default surface shrinkwrap and should only be used when required.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
Default envelopes can be created in the Envelope dialog box. Open the dialog box by selecting the View tab and clicking Envelope from the Manage Views drop-down menu. Manager
nl y
If the assembly already contains a default envelope(s), you select the one you wish to use in the Select envelope dialog box.
Module 7 | Page 33
PROCEDURE - Creating a Default Envelope Simplified Rep

Close Window Erase Not Displayed ENV_REP.ASM
Advanced_Assembly\Envelope_Default-Rep Task 1:
Begin defining the standard Default Envelope Rep.
4. Click OK.
5. From the In Graphics toolbar, click View Manager Default Envelope Rep on the Simp Rep tab. 6. In the Default envelope dialog box, do the following: Edit the Envelope Name to solid_outer. Edit the Part Name to solid_outer_env. Click OK.
8. Click OK in the Info dialog box, if necessary.
Fo r
Module 7 | Page 34
PT
7. Click OK in the Creation Options dialog box to complete the creation of the envelope part.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
3. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Envelope Components check box.
nl y
. Double-click
Task 2:
Create the shrinkwrap feature in the envelope part.
1. In the shrinkwrap creation dashboard, click the Subset button. 2. In the Shrinkwrap Comps component chooser, do the following: Set the derived status of the assembly to Ignore by selecting the check box next to ENV_REP.ASM in the structure tree. Click twice in the check boxes next to ENG_BLOCK_REAR.PRT, ENG_BLOCK_FRONT.PRT, CYLINDER.PRT, and CRANK.ASM to set their statuses to Consider. Click OK to close the Shrinkwrap Comps component chooser.
PT
3. In the shrinkwrap dashboard, select the Options tab and select the Solidify resulting geometry check box.
In
Fo r
2012 PTC
te rn
.
al
Module 7 | Page 35
U se
nl y
6. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Hidden Line from the Model Display types drop-down menu to verify that the envelope model is solid. 7. Select Shading from the Model Display types drop-down menu. 8. Cursor over the envelope model and notice that it highlights as a single solid component. Notice the envelope at the bottom of the model tree. 9. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed. Notice that only the envelope part is left in memory after completing this step. 10. Click OK to erase the models from memory. By default, envelope models are always displayed in the model tree. Envelope models never appear in BOMs or in the assembly unless they are substituted into a simplified rep. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
Module 7 | Page 36
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Creating Part Simplified Reps

You can substitute part simplified reps in assembly level simplified reps.
Part Simplified Reps: Attributes Features Work Region Surfaces Figure 1 Copied Surfaces
Figure 2 Work Region
te rn
You can create and use customized part simplified reps to do the following: Reduce the time required to open complex parts. Reduce complexity of a model. Create work regions or cutouts in the part that can be viewed in assembly simplified reps. Create a different representation or display of a component. You can view this simplified rep in part mode, substitute it into an assembly, or place it in a drawing view. Like assembly simplified reps, you should never use part simplified reps to create new part numbers. The workflow and options available for creating part simplified reps are much different than those found in an assembly simplified rep. To create a new part simplified rep, click View Manager the Simp Rep tab, click New. from the In Graphics toolbar. On
Fo r
Type a name for the new simplified rep and press ENTER. This opens the EDIT METHOD menu manager where you can define properties of the new rep, such as the following:
PT
Like assemblies, every Creo Parametric part contains a set of standard simplified reps. You can use geometry, graphics, and symbolic reps of a part to reduce the memory required to open a part.
In
Creating Part Simplified Reps
al
Figure 3 Excluded Features
U se
nl y
Substituting Part Simplified Reps
Fo r
Best Practices
Part simplified reps are best used for creating work regions to display in assembly simplified reps. In rare situations, you can use part simplified reps for large complicated models.
Module 7 | Page 38
PT
The User Defined option of an assembly simplified rep enables you to substitute a selected part with one of its simplified reps. This can be a rep that reduces feature count in a model, only includes surface selected geometry surfaces, or contains a work region cutout.
In
te rn
al
Attributes Select attributes to control the creation and updating of the simplified rep. Attributes are as follows: Include Feat By default, all features are included in the rep unless selected to be excluded. Exclude Feat By default, all features are excluded from the rep unless selected to be included. Regenerate Always recreate the simplified rep by regenerating the master rep. Accelerate Use the accelerator file to speed up retrieval of simplified reps. Whole Model Include all feature information in the simplified rep. GeomSnpshot The representation is a geometry only model; it includes no feature information and is only available when used with the Accelerate attribute. Features Select features to be excluded or included in the model. The available status, either Exclude or Include, is dependent on the status applied in the Attribute element. Work Region Create a cut feature to remove material from the model. A work region cut is only visible in the simplified rep. Surfaces Select surfaces from the model to be visible in the simplified rep. Using this option ensures that all part features are automatically excluded from display.
U se
nl y
2012 PTC
PROCEDURE - Creating Part Simplified Reps

Close Window Erase Not Displayed ENGINE_BLOCK. PRT
Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_ Part Task 1:
Create an exclude simplified rep in ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT.
3. Type no_fins_ribs as the new rep name and press ENTER. 4. In the menu manager, click Features. 5. In the model tree, select the groups FIN_PATTERN and RIBS. 6. Click Done and Done/Return from the menu manager.
Task 2:
Create a work region simplified rep in ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT.
1. Double-click Master Rep and click New.
Fo r
4. In the model tree, select the CUTAWAY_SKETCH sketch feature. 5. In the dashboard, edit the depth by clicking Through All . Click Change Depth Direction to make the cut upward.
6. Click Complete Feature and Done/Return from the menu manager to complete the rep. 7. Double-click Master Rep.
2012 PTC
PT
3. In the menu manager, click Work Region and Done.
2. Type cutaway as the new rep name and press ENTER.
In
te rn
al
Module 7 | Page 39
U se
nl y
2. Start the View Manager New.
from the In Graphics toolbar and click
Task 3:
Create a surfaces simplified rep in ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT.
1. In the View Manager dialog box, click New. 2. Type surfs as the new rep name and press ENTER. 3. In the menu manager, click Surfaces. 4. Press CTRL and in the graphics window, select the five model surfaces shown. 5. Click Complete Feature and Done/Return from the menu manager to complete the rep. 6. Double-click Master Rep.
Task 4:
Substitute the No_Fins_Ribs simplified part rep into the assembly.
1. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar and double-click ENGINE.ASM.
3. In the Select Rep dialog box, select NO_FINS_RIBS and click Apply.
Fo r
4. Start the View Manager
PT
2. In the graphics area, select ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT, right-click, and click Set Representation to > User Defined.
5. In the view manager, select Master Rep(+) from the list of simplified reps, right-click, and select Save. 6. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified Rep field to block_no_fins_ribs and click OK. 7. Double-click Master Rep.
Module 7 | Page 40
In
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Task 5:
Substitute the cutaway simplified part rep into the assembly.
1. In the graphics area, select ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT, right-click, and click Set Representation To > User Defined. 2. In the Select Rep dialog box, select CUTAWAY and click Apply. 3. In the view manager, select Master Rep(+) from the list of simplified reps, right-click, and select Save. 4. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified Rep field to block_cutaway and click OK.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 7 | Page 41
U se
nl y
Opening Simplified Reps

Open simplified reps directly in the Open dialog box.
Opening a simplified rep directly enables you to do the following: Open large assemblies without first bringing everything into session. Save time by opening only the components you want to open (those predefined in the simplified rep). Define a new simplified rep prior to opening an assembly. Preview the simplified rep before you open it. Read the simplified rep's description in a tool tip.
Fo r
To open a simplified rep, click the Open Rep button at the bottom of the Open dialog box.
Preview
In the Open Rep dialog box, click Preview Simplified Rep preview pane and view a simplified rep before opening it.
PT
Typically, you activate simplified reps when you first open the full master rep of an assembly. You can avoid bringing the entire assembly into session by opening a simplified rep directly in the Open dialog box.
Opening Simplified Reps
In
Figure 1 Open Rep with Preview
te rn
al
to expand the When you cursor over the name of a simplified rep in the Open Rep dialog box, you can read that rep's description in a tool tip.
Define a Simplified Rep

Click the Define button in the Open Rep dialog box to create a new simplified rep prior to opening an assembly into session.
Module 7 | Page 42
U se
2012 PTC
nl y
Open an External Simplified Rep

Click the External Rep button in the Open Rep dialog box to open an External simplified rep that is related to the model.
Auto Evaluate Model Rules

You have the option to evaluate rules when retrieving a simplified representation. When opening a simplified rep that is defined using rules, retrieving the rep as it was last evaluated can make some retrieval times faster. The auto_evaluate_simprep_rules CONFIG.pro option controls the default behavior during retrieval and regeneration of rule-based simplified representations. The Evaluate Rules check box enables you to override the default setting during retrieval.
There are two other ways to directly open a simplified rep: The open_simplified_rep_by_default configuration option enables you to open an assembly in a selected simplified representation. When this option is edited to yes, the Open Rep dialog box prompts you to select a simplified representation whenever an assembly is retrieved. This way, you can avoid opening large assemblies in their master representations and conserve system resources. If you edit the default rep of an assembly, that representation is opened instead of the master rep every time the assembly is opened.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
Other Methods for Opening a Simplified Rep
nl y
Module 7 | Page 43
PROCEDURE - Opening Simplified Reps

Close Window Erase Not Displayed NONE
Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Open Task 1:
Open a graphics rep directly in the Open dialog box.
1. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar. 2. In the Open dialog box, select but DO NOT open TLA.ASM. 3. After selecting TLA.ASM, click the Open drop-down menu and select Open Representation. 4. In the Open Rep dialog box, select Graphics Rep and click OK. 5. Disable all Datum Display types. 6. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar and notice that Graphics Rep is already selected. 7. Click Close .
8. Click Erase Not Displayed . If necessary, drag the dialog box wider to see the complete list of objects.
Fo r
The list of models in the Erase Not Displayed dialog box includes four assembly files and a graphics rep for each part in the assembly. These reps are the internal lightweight reps that Creo Parametric uses to open the graphics rep of the assembly.
9. Click OK to erase the listed models from session. Task 2: Open a user-defined rep directly in the Open dialog box. .
1. Click Open
2. In the Open dialog box, select but DO NOT open TLA.ASM. 3. After selecting TLA.ASM, click the Open drop-down menu and select Open Representation.
Module 7 | Page 44
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
4. In the Open Rep dialog box, click Preview Simplified Rep expand the preview pane. 5. Select NO_BLOWER_2. Notice that the preview updates.
to
6. Cursor over the custom rep names and notice the description for each rep opens in a tool tip. 7. Click OK to open the rep.
9. Click Close.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
Because you open this simplified rep directly in the Open Rep dialog box, it opens without bringing excluded components into session. Since you open the simplified rep in this manner, you do not have to manually remove excluded components from session.
In
10. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed. Notice there are no objects to erase.
te rn
8. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar and notice that NO_BLOWER_2 is already selected.
al
Module 7 | Page 45
U se
nl y
Fo r
Module 7 | Page 46
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
8
U se O nl y
Creating Cross-Sections, Display Styles, Layer States, and Combined Views

Module Overview
It is important to be able to easily create and reuse various views of your design assembly. The Cross-Section, Display Style, and Combination View tools in Creo Parametric enable you to create and manage many views of your assemblies.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: Create planar cross-sections in an assembly. Create offset cross-sections in an assembly. Create and use zone cross-sections in an assembly. Create display styles in an assembly. Create layer states in an assembly. Create combination views in an assembly.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 8 | Page 1
Understanding Assembly Cross-Sections

You can create planar, offset, and zone cross-sections in an assembly.
Assembly Cross-Sections: Planar Offset Zone
Figure 1 Planar Cross-Section
Understanding Assembly Cross-Sections

You can create a cross-sectional cut through an assembly to view the contents of the assembly at that section. You can view a cross-section as cross-hatching or a clipped cut in the assembly, or you can reference it to create a drawing view.
Creating Assembly Cross-Sections
Fo r
You create cross-sections using the Section dashboard. You can access the Section dashboard from either the Section types drop-down menu in the Model Display group of the View ribbon tab, or from the Sections tab of the view manager. Several types of cross-sections are available: Planar A planar cross-section is defined by a datum plane, coordinate system, or planar surface intersecting the model. X Direction An X Direction cross-section is defined as a planar cross-section referencing the X-axis of the default coordinate system. Y Direction A Y Direction cross-section is defined as a planar cross-section referencing the Y-axis of the default coordinate system. Z Direction A Z Direction cross-section is defined as a planar cross-section referencing the Z-axis of the default coordinate system. Offset An offset cross-section uses a sketched cut line to intersect the assembly. The cut line shape is then extruded in one or both directions from the sketch plane.
PT
You can separately define and edit the cross-hatching shown in each intersected component of the assembly.
In
te rn
Figure 2 Offset Cross-Section
al
U se
Figure 3 Zone
nl y
Zone A zone cross-section defines a region within an assembly that can be used to select a number of intersecting components.
Component Intersection
Using the Models tab in the Section dashboard, you can define how the section intersects the assemblys components. Available options are: Section Assembly You can select the entire assembly for intersection.
Cross-Section Display Options
Fo r
Activate Specifies the active cross-section, with the default selection being No Cross-Section. When a cross-section is specified as active, the model geometry is clipped at that cross-section. Flip the Clipping Direction Flips the geometry side that is clipped about the active section. Show Section Toggles the cross-hatching display on or off. Show Region Boundary Displays the boundary of the zone. Zone References Displays the references of the selected zone. Zone Components Highlights the components of the selected zone. Zone Only Displays only the components of the selected zone on the model.
Editing Cross-Sections
There are numerous editing operations that you can perform on cross-sections, including the following: Edit Hatching Enables you to edit existing hatch patterns or create new patterns. Delete Enables you to delete a cross-section from a model. Rename Enables you to rename the cross-section name. Copy Enables you to copy the selected cross-section to a new cross-section. Copy from File Enables you to copy a cross-section from another model and specify a new reference. Description Enables you to add a text description to a cross-section.
PT
In
te rn
al
You can configure several different cross-section display options in the view manager, including:
U se
You can select a single part in the assembly for Section Part intersection. Include all models Section all components intersected by the cross-section. Include selected models Section only the selected components that are intersected by the cross-section. Exclude selected models Section all components intersected by the cross-section, except those selected. Include Quilts Toggle the inclusion of quilts on and off.
nl y

You can create planar cross-sections in an assembly.
Available types: Planar X Direction Y Direction Z Direction Cross-section options Model selection Edit cross-section hatching Display management
Figure 2 Viewing a Cross-Section in the 2D Section Viewer
PT
In
Fo r

You can create new planar cross-sections in an assembly model. The following planar cross-section types are available:
Planar Enables you to select a planar surface or datum plane through which to create a cross-section. X Direction Creates a planar cross-section with the normal pointing along the assemblys default coordinate system X-axis. Y Direction Creates a planar cross-section with the normal pointing along the assemblys default coordinate system Y-axis. Z Direction Creates a planar cross-section with the normal pointing along the assemblys default coordinate system Z-axis. These cross-section types are created using the Section dashboard. You can access the Section dashboard from either the Section types drop-down menu in the Model Display group of the View ribbon tab, or from the Sections tab of the view manager.
te rn
Figure 3 Patterning a Cross-Section
al
U se
Figure 1 Creating a Cross-Section in an Assembly Model
nl y
New cross-sections are given the default names of XSEC0001, XSEC0002, and so on. You can always rename a cross-section either during or after creation, similar to any feature. You can also redefine cross-sections or manage their display using either the Sections node in the model tree or the Sections tab in the view manager.
Cross-Section Options
The following cross-section creation options are available in the Section dashboard: Distance from plane Enables you to type a distance to offset the cross-section from the specified reference. You can also dynamically drag the cross-section in the graphics window. Direction from plane Enables you to toggle the direction in which the cross-section is offset from the specified reference. Cap section Enables you to cap the surface of the cross-section. Fill surface color Enables you to fill the capped surface with a specified color. This option is only available if the cross-section is capped. Enable hatching Enables you to toggle the cross-sections hatch pattern on or off. The system automatically varies the hatching of the various components in the assembly. 3D Dragger You can enable the 3D Dragger and use it to translate or rotate the cross-section about the three axes. This is similar to the 3D Dragger in Assembly mode. View 2-D section in separate window Enables you to display the 2-D cross-section in a separate window. Components display in model color in this dialog box. Interference between components displays in red by default, although you can change this interference color in the Options tab in the Section dashboard.
Fo r
If the hatch pattern is enabled for a given cross-section, you can edit the hatching either from the Sections node in the model tree or from the view manager. When you edit the hatch pattern, the Edit Hatching dialog box displays with the following options: Pattern Enables you to edit the hatch pattern used. You can select from a default library of ANSI or ISO hatch patterns, or choose from a user-defined library hatch pattern. You must first select the component for which the hatch pattern is to be edited. Angle Enables you to specify the angle of the hatch pattern. Scale Enables you to size the pattern. You can type a value, or use the two options to either halve or double the existing hatch spacing. Color Enables you to modify the color that the hatch pattern displays in the graphics window.
Model Selection
When creating a cross-section in an assembly model, you can specify which models in the assembly are sectioned. The following options are available:
PT
Editing Cross-Section Hatching
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Include all models All models in the assembly are sectioned. This is the default option. Include selected models Enables you to specify only the models to be sectioned in the assembly. Exclude selected models Enables you to specify the models that are not to be sectioned in the assembly.
Cross-Section Display Management

You can manage the display of a given cross-section from the Sections node in the model tree, from the view manager, or by selecting the cross-section in the graphics window. The following right-click options are available: Show Section Enables you to enable or disable the cross-section within the graphics window. This option enables or disables both the section itself and the hatch pattern. Activate/Deactivate Activates or deactivates cut on the geometry based on the cross-section.
Fo r
Module 8 | Page 6
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Assembly Cross-Sections

Close Window Erase Not Displayed SECTIONS.ASM
View\Cross-Section_Assembly-Planar Task 1:
Create default X, Y, and Z cross-sections
from the 3. Select X Direction Section types drop-down menu. 4. In the dashboard, click Hatch Pattern . 5. Click Complete Feature . 6. Notice that the hatch pattern for the BODY.PRT is not easily distinguishable. 7. In the model tree, locate cross-section XSEC0001.
Fo r
Click Halve Hatch Size two times. Click Apply and close the Edit Hatching dialog box.
9. In the model tree, right-click XSEC0001 and select Deactivate.
10. Right-click and select Show Section to toggle it off. 11. Click in the background of the graphics window to de-select all geometry.
2012 PTC
PT
8. Right-click and select Edit Hatching. Select BODY.PRT. Edit the Angle to 15 and press ENTER.
In
te rn
al
Module 8 | Page 7
U se
nl y
2. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
12. Select Y Direction from the Section types drop-down menu. 13. In the dashboard, click Flip Clipping Direction .
15. In the 2D Section Viewer dialog box, click Rotate Right necessary. 16. Notice the interference highlighted in red. 17. Click Complete Feature 18. Right-click and select Deactivate. 19. Select Z Direction from the Section types drop-down menu. 20. Edit the offset value to 28. 21. In the dashboard, select the Models tab. Select Exclude selected models. Select PLATE.PRT. 22. In the dashboard, click Fill . if
Fo r
and select the Surface darkest red color. .
23. Click Complete Feature 24. Right-click and select Deactivate.
Module 8 | Page 8
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
14. In the dashboard, click 2D View .
Task 2:
Create and pattern a cross-section based on a selected plane. from the Section types drop-down menu. from the Status bar.
1. Select Planar 2. Click Find
Click 2D View
. .
6. Zoom in on the keyway detail. 7. Click Complete Feature 8. Right-click and select Deactivate.
9. With the section still selected, right-click and select Pattern. 10. Select the top surface of ARM.PRT.
11. In the dashboard, click Flip First Direction . Edit the quantity to 5. Edit the spacing to 22.
Fo r
PT
In
13. In the model tree, expand the Pattern 2 of XSEC0004 feature. Select XSEC0004, press CTRL, and select the remaining four patterned sections. Right-click and select Show Section.
2012 PTC
te rn
.
al
Module 8 | Page 9
U se
5. In the dashboard, click Hatch Pattern .
4. Edit the offset to 0 and press ENTER.
nl y
3. In the Search Tool dialog box, select ARM.PRT from the Look in drop-down list. Click Find Now. Select Z-AXIS and click Add Item . Click Close.
Task 3:
Investigate cross-sections from the view manager.
from
Fo r
Module 8 | Page 10
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
2. In the view manager, select the Sections tab. Click New and view the available options. Right-click XSEC0001 and notice the available options. Click Close.
Creating Offset Assembly Cross-Sections

Offset cross-sections enable you to sketch the shape of the cross-section intersecting your assembly.
Offset Cross-Section Options: Define cut line sketch. Section direction. Models to intersect. Hatching display. Interference display.
Creating Offset Assembly Cross-Sections
Fo r
An offset cross-section uses a sketched cut line to intersect the assembly. You define the cut line shape in Sketcher and then extrude it in one or both directions from the sketch plane. You can only sketch the cut line for an offset cross-section using straight lines. If you want the cross-section to be viewed in a clipped display, the sketch must be an open sketch.
Creating an Offset Cross-Section

To create an offset cross-section, click New > Offset from the Sections tab of the view manager, type a name, and press ENTER. The Section dashboard opens, and has the following options: Flip Clipping Direction the section is created. Changes the side of the sketch on which
Extend Section First Side Extends the cross-section to the first side of the sketch plane, or enables you to select None.
PT
Figure 2 Adjustable Hatching
In
te rn
Figure 3 Cut Line Sketch
al
U se
Figure 1 Offset Cross-Section
nl y
Extend Section Second Side Extends the cross-section to the second side of the sketch plane, or enables you to select None. Cap Section geometry. Displays surfaces over openings in the sectioned solid
Fill Surface Enables you to select a color from the palette for the surface of the cross-section. By default, the colors from the individual components are used. Hatch Pattern Toggles the display of cross-hatching on and off. The Models tab has several options available for determining which models are intersected by the section: Include all models Sections all components intersected by the cross-section. Include selected models Sections only the selected components that are intersected by the cross-section. Exclude selected models Sections all components intersected by the cross-section, except those selected.
The Options tab allows you to toggle the display of interference and to change the display color of any interference.
Fo r
Module 8 | Page 12
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Offset Assembly Cross-Sections

Close Window Erase Not Displayed OFFSET_XSEC.ASM
View\Cross-Section_Assembly-Offset Task 1:
Create an offset section through the assembly.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the model tree, click Settings 4. Click OK. 5. Click View Manager > Tree Filters....
3. In the Display section, select the Features check box.
7. Click New > Offset, type b, and press ENTER. 8. Right-click and select Define Internal Sketch.
Fo r
13. Select the datum curve named SECT_B-B, as shown in the image. 14. Click OK on the Sketch tab. from the .
15. Click Hatch Pattern dashboard.
2012 PTC
PT
12. Click Project from the Sketching group. Select Loop from the Type dialog box.
11. Select ASM_TOP as the orientation reference and click Sketch.
In
10. Click Flip to change the sketch view orientation, then select Top from the Orientation drop-down list.
te rn
al
Module 8 | Page 13
9. Select ASM_FRONT as the sketch plane.
U se
6. Select the Sections tab in the view manager.
nl y
Task 2:
Edit the hatching of the cross-section.
1. In the view manager, right-click B and select Edit Hatching. 2. Expand DRILL_CHUCK.ASM in the model tree and select CHUCK.PRT. 3. Select Use hatch from the part in the Edit Hatching dialog box.
5. Click Halve Hatch Size 6. Click Apply.
7. Click Close in the view manager. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
Module 8 | Page 14
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
4. Edit the Angle to 30.
Creating Zone Assembly Cross-Sections

Create a zone to organize your large assembly.
Zone Definition Methods: Half-Space Inside-Outside Radial Distance From Offset CSYS
Figure 1 Half-Space Orientation
Figure 2 Activated Zone
Creating Zone Assembly Cross-Sections

Zones are 3-D cross-sections that define a region in the assembly. Zones are used to identify, select, and manage components within the assembly. Components are identified and selected based on their position inside or outside of the defined region of the zone. You can use zones for the following: Organize an assembly. Control view clipping. Select components using the Find tool. Define envelope parts. To create a zone, click New on the Xsec tab of the view manager. Type a name, press ENTER, and select Zone from the XSEC OPTS menu. In the Zone dialog box, you can use any combination of the following zone definition methods: Half-Space The negative or positive side of a selected planar reference. Inside-Outside Inside or outside of a selected closed quilt. Radial Distance From A radial distance from a selected entity. Offset CSYS Inside or outside of a bounding box created by offset distances from a selected coordinate system. You can select more than one reference to define an assembly zone. When you select a reference in the references area of the dialog box, it is
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
Figure 3 Zone Region Boundary
U se
nl y
highlighted in the Graphics window. Two or more references always have logical AND and OR capabilities.
Best Practices
Everyone's design environment is different; however, you typically only use the Zone tool for managing very large assemblies. You may not see a benefit using it with small to medium sized assemblies.
Fo r
Module 8 | Page 16
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Zone Assembly Cross-Sections

Close Window Erase Not Displayed ZONES.ASM
View\Cross-Section_Assembly-Zone Task 1:
Create a half-space zone to define a selection of components.
5. Select the front circular face of the GEARBOX_FRONT.PRT.
6. In the Zone1 dialog box, click Display > Mark Tree. Notice that this adds a column to the model tree, identifying the components intersected by the zone.
In
7. Click Change Orientation
Fo r
9. Click Accept Settings to complete the zone creation.
10. Double-click Zone1 to activate it. 11. Double-click No Cross Section to activate it.
12. Right-click Zone1 and select Show Region Boundary.
2012 PTC
PT
8. Click Display > Mark Tree again. In the model tree, notice that the components identified to be included in the zone have changed.
te rn
Notice the arrows pointing away from the selected surface, towards the models to be included in the zone.
al
to edit the direction of the zone.
U se
Module 8 | Page 17
4. Click New > Zone, type zone1, and press ENTER.
3. Select the Sections tab in the view manager, if necessary.
nl y
from
13. Observe the components intersected by the zone. From the In Graphics toolbar, click the Named Views drop-down list and select Right. Click Named Views and select Top. Select Default Orientation from the Named Views Task 2: .
1. Right-click Zone1 and de-select Show Region Boundary. 2. In the view manager, select the Simp Rep tab and click New. 3. Type from_zone1 and press ENTER.
Fo r
5. In the Search Tool:1 dialog box, do the following: Select the Geometry tab. Ensure that Zone is the selected rule. Ensure that Inside the zone is selected from the Comparison drop-down list. Ensure that ZONE1 (ZONES.ASM) is selected from the Value drop-down list. Click Find Now. Press CTRL+A to select all the items in the found column. and click Close. Click Add Column
6. In the Edit:FROM_ZONE1 component chooser, right-click the selected components and click Set Representation to > Master. 7. Click OK to complete the simplified rep. 8. Click Close from the view manager.
Module 8 | Page 18
PT
In
te rn
4. In the Edit:FROM_ZONE1 component chooser, click Select > Advanced Search.
al
U se
Use the zone to select components to include in a new simplified rep.
nl y
2012 PTC
The simplified rep includes all components that are a part of the zone. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 8 | Page 19
U se
nl y
Creating Display Styles

Use display styles to assign display settings to individual components of an assembly.
Display Styles: Wireframe Hidden Line No Hidden Shaded Transparent Blank
Creating Display Styles
Wireframe Shows front and back lines equally. Hidden Line Shows hidden lines in ghost tones. No Hidden Does not show lines behind forward surfaces. Shaded Shows the model as a shaded solid. Transparent Shows the model as a transparent solid. Blank Does not show the model. You can also modify component display styles without using the view manager. You can select desired models in the Graphics window, model tree, or search tool and click View > Display Style to assign a display style to the selected models. You can store these temporary edits with a new display style or update them to an existing one. After you define the default style, it appears each time the model is opened.
Fo r
Uses of Display Styles

You use display styles to do the following: Increase system performance by either blanking components from display or limiting the number of components being calculated for hidden line display.
PT
You can assign one of the following display styles to components in an assembly:
In
Use the Style tab in the view manager to create display styles for your assembly.
te rn
The display of models in a Creo Parametric session are controlled by the four following display options: Wireframe, Hidden Line, No Hidden, and Shaded. You can also assign display styles to individual components in an assembly that can be used regardless of those overall session settings.
al
U se
Figure 1 Display Styles
nl y
Create and save display settings used in presentations or other common situations where it is helpful to change the display of components within an assembly. You cannot use display styles in drawing view. Blanked components are not removed from session memory; they are only removed from display. For this reason, you cannot use display styles to reduce the amount of memory required to open and work with an assembly. You reduce the required memory using simplified reps.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 8 | Page 21
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Display Styles

Close Window Erase Not Displayed GEARBOX_S2.ASM
View\Display-Style_View-Manager Task 1:
Create a new display style using the view manager.
3. Select the Style tab in the view manager. 4. Click New. 5. Press ENTER to accept the default name Style0001. This opens the EDIT: STYLE0001 dialog box on the Blank tab. 6. In the model tree, select GEARBOX_REAR_S2.PRT. 7. Click Update View .
9. Click Update View
PT
8. In the model tree, select the four BOLT_5-18.PRT models. Notice that the Blank component status is shown in the Edit column of the model tree.
Fo r
10. In the EDIT: STYLE0001 dialog box, select the Show tab and click Transparent. 11. In the model tree, expand DRILL_CHUCK_S2.ASM and then select CHUCK_S2.PRT and GEARBOX_FRONT_S2.PRT. 12. Click Update View 13. Click Accept Changes . .
Module 8 | Page 22
In
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
from the Manage Views drop-down menu in 2. Click View Manager the Model Display group.
Task 2:
Copy and redefine to create a new display style.
1. With Style0001 still active, click Edit > Copy in the view manager. 2. Click OK to create a new display style named Style0002. 3. Double-click Style0002 to activate it. 4. Click Edit > Redefine from the view manager. 5. In the model tree, select CHUCK_S2.PRT and PRIME_GEAR_S2.PRT to also be blanked. 6. Click Update View .
8. Click Accept Changes Task 3:
Use the model tree to edit a display style.
2. Click OK to create a new display style named Style0003. 3. Double-click display style Style0003 to activate it.
5. In the model tree, click Settings 6. In the Model Tree Columns dialog box, select Display Styles from the Type drop-down list. 7. In the Display Style list, select STYLE0003 and click Add Column to add the column to the model tree.
In
4. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Shading Display types drop-down menu.
te rn
1. With Style0002 still active, click Edit > Copy in the view manager.
al
Fo r
8. Click OK to close the dialog box. 9. In the STYLE0003 column of the model tree, click to the right of GEARBOX_FRONT_S2.PRT and select Blank from the drop-down list. 10. To the right of PRIME_GEAR_ S2.PRT, select Undo from the drop-down list.
PT
U se
from the Model > Tree Columns.
7. Select Hidden Line from the Model Display type drop-down menu.
nl y
> Tree Columns.
12. In the Model Tree Columns dialog box, click Remove Column and OK to close the dialog box. Using the model tree to edit display styles does not provide you with the option to preview or reset any edits that you make. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
Module 8 | Page 24
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Creating Layer States in an Assembly

Use layer states to efficiently save and recall combinations of layer statuses in an assembly.
Layer States: Save current layer statuses Recall defined layer statuses Manage display of layers for: Annotations Datum Features Construction Geometry
In
te rn
Creating Layer States in an Assembly
Layer states are created on the Layers tab of the view manager. Layer states enable you to save and recall a set of defined layer statuses in a model. You can create multiple states to capture different combinations of layer statuses and quickly toggle between each state as needed. To create a layer state, you first set the status of layers as you want to save them. For example, you may want to hide all layers containing datum features and then save that status. In the Layers tab of the view manager, click New to create a layer state that saves the current layer statuses. If a layer state is active and the display of layers is edited, the active layer state is marked with a plus sign (+), indicating that it is modified. You can do the following: Double-click the layer state to reset the model's layers as defined by the unmodified layer state. Right-click the layer state and select Set Active to reset the model's layers as defined by the unmodified layer state.
Fo r
PT
al
Figure 1 Layers Tab of the View Manager
U se
nl y
Right-click the layer state and select Save to save the modified layer state using the model's current layers statuses. The hiding an item action places that item on the Hidden Items layer. Therefore, the statuses of hidden items are also saved in a layer state.
Best Practices
It is a best practice to use simplified reps, instead of layers, to exclude components from display in an assembly. Layer states are best used to manage the display of the following: Annotations The display of annotations can be controlled using layer states in combination with combination views to document a model. Datum Features Datum planes, axes, points, and coordinate systems. Construction Geometry Surfaces, curves, and other features used to create complex model geometry.
Fo r
Module 8 | Page 26
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Layer States in an Assembly

Close Window Erase Not Displayed LAYERS.ASM
View\Layer-States_Assembly Task 1:
Create a layer state to hide the assembly's datum features and reference geometry.
1. Enable only the following Datum 2. In the ribbon, select the View tab. Click Layers from the Visibility group. 3. In the layer tree, select 01_ALL_DTM_PLN. Press SHIFT and select 06__PRT_ALL_SURFS. Right-click and select Hide. 4. Start the View Manager from the Model Display group. On the Layers tab, select New. 5. Type datum_refs_hide and press ENTER. 6. Click Close from the view manager. Task 2:
Fo r
1. In the layer tree, select 03_ALL_CURVES. Right-click and select Unhide.
2. Select 03___PRT_ALL_ CURVES. Right-click and select Unhide. 3. Select 06_ALL_SURFS. Right-click and select Unhide.
4. Select 06___PRT_ALL_SURFS. Right-click and select Unhide. 5. Start the View Manager from the Model Display group. On the Layers tab, select New.
2012 PTC
PT
Create a layer state to hide the assembly's datum features but not surfaces and curves.
In
te rn
al
Module 8 | Page 27
U se
nl y
Display types:
6. Click No in the Modified State Save dialog box. You click No because you do not want to modify DATUM_REFS_HIDE. 7. Type curves_surfs_unhide and press ENTER. 8. Click Close from the view manager. 9. Click in the graphics area. Spin, pan, and zoom the model to see that curves and surfaces are now unhidden.
10. Click Named Views from the In Graphics toolbar and select Standard Orientation. 11. In the layer tree, right-click and select Reset Status. 12. Click in the graphics area. Click Repaint toolbar to update the display.
from the Model Display group. On the 13. Start the View Manager Layers tab, double-click Datum_Refs_Hide.
14. Double-click Curves_Surfs_Unhide. 15. Double-click Datum_Refs_Hide. 16. Click Close.
Fo r
Module 8 | Page 28
PT
In
The layer display statuses change in the layer tree as you edit layer states.
te rn
al
U se
from the In Graphics
O
2012 PTC
nl y
Creating Combination Views

Combine and save simplified reps, style states, cross-sections, orientations, and exploded views as combination views.
Combine the following: Simplified Reps Display Styles Cross-Sections Orientations Exploded Views Layer States
Figure 1 Simplified Reps and Styles
Figure 2 Cross-Section with Display Styles
te rn
Creating Combination Views
Fo r
You can create and activate combination views on the All tab of the view manager. The following display states can be combined and saved within a combination view: Simplified Reps Display Styles Cross-Sections Orientations Exploded Views Layer States
Tabbed Display of Combination Views

When you select Display combined views on the All tab of the view manager, each combination view displays in a tabbed window at the bottom of the main Creo Parametric graphics area. You can select each tab to quickly navigate from one combination view to another.
PT
A combination view enables you to combine and apply multiple view manager states. You can save combination views to quickly switch between customized combination views.
In
al
Figure 3 Exploded View with Display Styles
U se
nl y
You can hide a tab by de-selecting the Tab Display check box next to a view name in the All tab or by selecting Hide from the shortcut menu. Additional shortcut menus enable you to configure and edit the tabbed display as follows: Redefine Open the combination view dialog box (the name of the dialog box changes depending on the view name) to edit the view's definition. Remove Delete the selected combination view and display tab. Rename Rename the combination view and display tab. Description Type or edit the description of the selected combination view. Display Customization Open the view manager to the All tab and edit the tab display. View Set the size of the tab previews to Small, Medium, or Large.
Uses of Combination Views

You typically use combination views to do the following:
Originals or Copies
Each time you create a new combination view, the New Presentation State dialog box opens and presents you with the following choices: Reference Originals This option uses existing orientations, styles, simplified reps, and so on, to create the combination view. Create Copies Be aware that this option creates a copy of every display state used in the combination view. It uses the new copies to create the combination view. Using the Create Copies option creates new orientations, styles, simplified reps, and so on, in your model.
Fo r
Best Practices
Combination views are a useful tool for accessing the specific combination of display views that you use repeatedly to design or display your product.
Module 8 | Page 30
PT
In
te rn
Combination views can be placed in drawings for documentation or presentation purposes.
al
Save the common working configuration. For example, you can use a view including a specific orientation, cross-section, and simplified rep when designing a component within an assembly. Save combinations used to create images for presentations. For example, you can save a view including specific orientations and styles for reproducible image captures.
U se
O
2012 PTC
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Combination Views

Close Window View\Combination Task 1: Erase Not Displayed COMBO.ASM
Create a new combination view.
3. Press ENTER to accept the default name Comb0001.
6. Select 3D_Side from the Orientation drop-down list. 7. Select Datum_Refs_Hide from the Layers drop-down list. 8. Click Update Screen .
10. Click Update Screen
In
9. Select Cut_Away from the Simplified Rep drop-down list. .
11. Select Trans_Rear from the Style drop-down list.
PT
Fo r
12. Click Update Screen
13. Select the show exploded check box. 14. Click Update Screen .
15. Clear the show exploded check box. 16. Click Accept Settings .
2012 PTC
te rn
.
al
Module 8 | Page 31
U se
5. In the view manager, click Edit > Redefine to open the COMB0001 dialog box.
4. Click Reference Originals in the New Presentation State dialog box.
nl y
2. Click View Manager tab and click New.
from the In Graphics toolbar. Select the All
Task 2:
Save selected states and views to a combination view.
1. In the view manager, double-click the combination view named Default All. 2. On the Simp Rep tab, double-click Rear_Box. from the In 3. Click Refit Graphics toolbar. 4. On the Style tab, double-click Wire_Gears. 5. On the Sections tab, double-click A. 6. On the Orient tab, double-click 3D_Front. from the In 7. Click Refit Graphics toolbar. 8. Right-click the 3D_Front(+) modified view and select Save.... 9. Click OK in the Save Display Elements dialog box.
11. Press ENTER to accept the default name Comb0002.
Fo r
15. Select each combination view tab at the bottom of your graphics window. Also notice the preview as you cursor over each tab.
Module 8 | Page 32
PT
13. On the All tab of the view manager, select the Display combined views check box. This adds a tabbed display of the combination views at the bottom of the main graphics window.
12. Click Reference Originals in the New Presentation State dialog box.
In
10. On the All tab, click New.
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
16. Right-click the Comb0002 tab and select Hide. . On the All tab, notice the Tab Display 17. Click View Manager check box has been cleared. If you select Hide, only the tab for that view is hidden. If you select Remove, the view is deleted. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 8 | Page 33
U se
nl y
Fo r
Module 8 | Page 34
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
9
U se O nl y
Module 9 | Page 1
Substituting Components using User Defined, Envelopes, and Simplified Reps

Module Overview
Objectives
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
After completing this module, you will be able to: Create envelope models using a variety of methods. Substitute models using By Envelope. Substitute models using User Defined. Substitute models using By Model.
In
te rn
al
In Creo Parametric, you can substitute large complicated components with simplified reps, envelopes, or models related by family tables or interchange assemblies. These tools enable you to control and manage the system resources required to work with large assemblies.
Understanding Envelopes
You can substitute envelopes for more complex components in order to reduce memory requirements of an assembly.
Envelope Creation Methods: Create Envelope Part Select Existing Assembly Component Surface Subset Shrinkwrap Faceted Solid Shrinkwrap All Solid Surfaces Subset Shrinkwrap
Figure 1 Full Assembly
Figure 2 Envelopes Created using Different Methods
Creating Envelopes
Fo r
You create envelopes within an assembly using the envelope manager. Access the envelope manager by clicking View > Envelope Manager or by selecting Envelope as the model type in the Component Create dialog box. The definition of every envelope part begins in the Envelope Definition dialog box where the following attributes are defined: Name You can type the envelope name in either the Component Create dialog box or the Envelope Definition dialog box. Components to Substitute You select parts and sub-assemblies from an assembly to be substituted by the envelope. Envelope Geometry You can use feature creation tools to define geometry in an already created envelope. For example, you can add an extrusion to refine the definition of a model created using the Faceted Solid Shrinkwrap option. Envelope Part Every envelope has a part model associated with it. Click the Envelope Part button to open the Envelope Method dialog box where you can select from the following four different methods of creation:
PT
An envelope is a part created to represent a predetermined selection of components in an assembly. The envelope uses simple geometry to reduce memory usage and looks similar to the components it represents.
In
Understanding Envelopes
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Using Envelopes
Use Envelope You can right-click an envelope part in the model tree and select Use Envelope. This substitutes the selected envelope into the assembly and marks the active simplified rep as modified. Substitute by Envelope When creating or editing a simplified rep using the Component Chooser, you can set the status of components the envelope represents to Substitute by Envelope. Note that this substitution only works for components that the envelope is defined to represent. User Defined You can include an envelope in a simplified rep and then use the User Defined status to substitute that simplified rep with higher level simplified reps.
Fo r
Envelope Displays and BOMs

Envelope models are only simplified representations of design models. For this reason, envelope parts: Do not appear in the Assembly BOM. Do not appear in assemblies unless they are substituted into a simplified rep.
PT
Although envelopes are stored as part files with a .PRT extension, you can only use them as envelopes in the assembly in which they were created. To use an envelope part, you must explicitly include it in a simplified rep by substituting it for the components that it represents. You can substitute an envelope into a simplified rep using one of the following methods:
In
te rn
al
Always add an _env suffix to an envelope's part file name. This enables you to recognize them as envelope parts in your local file structure or data management tool.
U se
Create Envelope Part A new part is created and geometry is then added using a variety of geometry creation methods. Select Existing Assembly Component This converts a selected part in the assembly to an envelope. Because the part is an envelope, it no longer displays in the assembly. Use this method if you have created or copied a part that you want to turn into an envelope. Surface Subset Shrinkwrap You create an envelope part using the Surface Subset Shrinkwrap functionality. This method creates an associative surface representation of the referenced components. Faceted Solid Shrinkwrap An envelope part is created using the Facet Solid Shrinkwrap functionality. This method creates a tessellated solid representation of the referenced components. This shrinkwrap type cannot be modified and is not associative with geometry changes in these models. All Solid Surfaces Subset Shrinkwrap You create an envelope part using the All Solid Surfaces Shrinkwrap functionality. This method creates an associative representation by copying all solid surface geometry from the selected subset of components. Using the All Solid Surfaces Shrinkwrap functionality, this model can be left as a surface model, converted to solid, and simplified using the Fill Contours tool.
nl y
By default, appear in the model tree of an assembly; however, they are identified by both the envelope name and part name. You can change model tree settings to disable envelope display.
Best Practices
If you are responsible for a large assembly, it is a good practice to create a lightweight simplified rep that can be used by downstream users of your assembly. Envelopes are a valuable tool for providing those users with the lightweight model, yet also providing them with key geometric and BOM information.
Fo r
Module 9 | Page 4
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Creating and using a Surface Subset Shrinkwrap Envelope

You can simplify an assembly using an envelope created using the Surface Subset Shrinkwrap method.
Surface Subset Shrinkwrap Envelope Part Name Quality Level Attributes
Creating and Using a Surface Subset Shrinkwrap Envelope

You can create an envelope part and its geometry automatically using the Surface Subset Shrinkwrap method. Using this method, a subset of surface geometry is copied from the original assembly into the envelope part. You can control the level of surface detail copied into the model using the following options: Quality Level You can edit the relative quality of the shrinkwrap feature creation process to a value between 1 and 10. High quality levels increase processing time, file size, and the level of detail included in the shrinkwrap feature. Attributes You can select attributes which control the automatic selection of shrinkwrap geometry. You can select one of the following: Auto Hole Filling Fill all holes or cuts that intersect a single surface. Include Quilts Select quilts that should always be included in the Shrinkwrap feature. Ignore Small Surfaces Exclude surfaces that are smaller than a specified percentage of the overall model size. You can only create envelopes using Shrinkwrap methods when the master representation is active.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Figure 2 Surface Subset Envelope
Module 9 | Page 5
U se
nl y
Associative Geometry
Geometry that you create using the Surface Subset Shrinkwrap method is associative to the component geometry that it references. If the referenced components change, geometry in the envelope updates accordingly.
Using Surface Subset Shrinkwrap Envelopes

Like any envelope, you can substitute those you create using the Surface Subset Shrinkwrap method into an assembly's simplified rep.
Fo r
Module 9 | Page 6
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating and Using a Surface Subset Shrinkwrap Envelope

Advanced_Assembly\Envelope_Shrinkwrap-Surface ECAD_CNTRL2.ASM Task 1: Create an envelope part using the envelope manager.
> Tree Filters....
3. Under the Display field, select the Envelope Components check box. Click OK. 4. Click the Manage Views drop-down menu from the Model Display . group, and select Envelope Manager 5. Click New... in the Envelope dialog box.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
6. In the Envelope Definition component chooser, do the following: Near the top of the component chooser, edit the envelope name ENVLP001 to swsurf_pcb. In the structure tree, select the ECAD_CNTRL2.ASM check box to include all its components. Click Envelope Part.
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Module 9 | Page 7
Including all components of ECAD_CNTRL2.ASM in the envelope definition means that the entire assembly can be substituted by the envelope. 7. In the Envelope Method dialog box, do the following: Select the Surface Subset Shrinkwrap radio button. Edit the Name to swsurf_pcb_env. Edit the Quality Level to 5. Click OK in the Alert dialog box, if necessary. Ensure that Auto Hole Filling is selected. Click OK.
9. In the Envelope dialog box, select the envelope SWSURF_PCB and click Info.
12. Click Close
Fo r
Module 9 | Page 8
PT
11. Click Close in the INFORMATION WINDOW and Close in the Envelope dialog box. .
In
10. Scroll down in the INFORMATION WINDOW and notice that it lists all components to be substituted by the envelope. Notice that the envelope is not currently used in any rep.
te rn
al
8. After the part has been generated, click OK in the Envelope Definition component chooser. Notice that you can now see the envelope in the model tree.
U se
O
2012 PTC
nl y
Task 2:
Use the model tree to substitute the envelope into an assembly. . Select HOUSING_BTM2.ASM and click Open. > Tree Filters....
1. Click Open
3. Under the Display field, select the Envelope Components check box. Click OK. 4. In the model tree, expand ECAD_CNTRL2.ASM. Right-click SWSURF_PCB <SWSURF_PCB_ENV.PRT> and click Set Representation to > Use Envelope. 5. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar.
8. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified Rep field to env_pcb and click OK. 9. Click Close from the view manager.
11. Click OK in the Erase Not Displayed dialog box.
Fo r
1. From the Quick Access toolbar, click Open HOUSING_BTM3.ASM and click Open.
PT
Task 3:
Use the Simplified Rep component chooser to substitute the same envelope into another assembly. . Select
In
There are many components that you can now erase from the session memory because they are substituted by the envelope part.
3. Type env_pcb in the Name field and press ENTER.
2012 PTC
te rn
10. In the main toolbar, click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
. Click New on the Simp Rep tab.
al
U se
7. In the Simp Rep tab, right-click the modified Master Rep(+) and select Save....
6. Select the Simp Rep tab, if necessary.
nl y
Module 9 | Page 9
Fo r
6. Click Display Style > No from the Model Hidden Display group. 7. In the model tree, expand ECAD_CNTRL2.ASM. 8. Right-click SWSURF_PCB <SWSURF_PCB_ENV.PRT> and select Open.
Module 9 | Page 10
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
4. In the Edit:ENV_PCB component chooser, do the following: Right-click HOUSING_BTM3.ASM and click Set Representation to > Master. Expand ECAD_CNTRL2.ASM and select PCB_CNTRL2.PRT. Scroll to the bottom of the structure tree. Press SHIFT and select LCC28.PRT. Right-click the selected components and click Substitute > Envelope. In the Select envelope dialog box, select SWSURF_PCB(ECAD_ CNTRL2), and click OK. Click OK to complete the simplified rep.
The magenta shrinkwrap feature surfaces of the envelope were substituted for the assembly. 9. Click Shading .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 9 | Page 11
U se
nl y
Creating and Using a Faceted Shrinkwrap Envelope

You can simplify an assembly using an envelope created using the Faceted Shrinkwrap method.
Faceted Solid Shrinkwrap Envelope Part Name Quality Level Attributes
You can create an envelope part and its geometry automatically using the Faceted Shrinkwrap method. Using this method, you can create a solid faceted part based on the geometry of referenced components. You can control the level of detail referenced and the quality of tessellation used to create faceted geometry using the following options: Quality Level You can edit the relative quality of the shrinkwrap feature creation process to a value between 1 and 10. High quality levels increase processing time, file size, and the level of detail included in the shrinkwrap feature. Attributes You can select attributes which control the automatic selection of shrinkwrap geometry: Auto Hole Filling Fill all holes or cuts that intersect a single surface. Include Quilts Select quilts that should always be included in the shrinkwrap feature. Ignore Small Surfaces Exclude surfaces that are smaller than a specified percentage of the overall model size.
Fo r
Non-Associative Geometry
Geometry created using the Faceted Shrinkwrap method is not associative to the component geometry that it references. If the referenced components change, geometry in the envelope does not update.
Using Faceted Shrinkwrap Envelopes

Like any envelope, you can substitute those that you create using the Faceted Shrinkwrap method into an assembly's simplified rep.
PT
In
te rn
Creating and Using a Faceted Shrinkwrap Envelope
al
Figure 2 Faceted Shrinkwrap Envelope
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating and Using a Faceted Shrinkwrap Envelope

Advanced_Assembly\Envelope_Shrinkwrap-Faceted ECAD_OPTIC2.ASM Task 1: Create an envelope part using the Component Create dialog box.
> Tree Filters....
3. Under Display, select the Envelope Components check box. Click OK. 4. Click Create from the Component group.
5. In the Component Create dialog box, click Envelope. Type swfac_pcb and click OK. 6. Within the Envelope Definition component chooser, do the following: In the structure tree, select the ECAD_OPTIC2.ASM check box to include all its components. Click Envelope Part.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Module 9 | Page 13
9. Click Close Task 2:
from the Quick Access toolbar.
1. Click Open
. Select HOUSING_FR2.ASM and click Open. > Tree Filters....
3. Under Display, select the Envelope Components check box. Click OK.
PT
4. In the model tree, expand ECAD_OPTIC2.ASM. Right-click SWFAC_PCB <SWFAC_PCB_ENV.PRT> and click Set Representation to > Use Envelope.
Fo r
6. On the Simp Rep tab, right-click the modified Master Rep(+) and select Save.... 7. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified Rep field to env_pcb and click OK.
8. Click Close from the view manager. 9. From the main toolbar, click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed. There are many components that you can now erase from the session memory because they were substituted by the envelope part. 10. Click OK in the Erase Not Displayed dialog box.
Module 9 | Page 14
In
te rn
al
Use the model tree to substitute the envelope into an assembly.
U se
8. After the part has been generated, click OK from the Envelope Definition component chooser. Notice that you can now see the envelope in the model tree.
nl y
2012 PTC
7. In the Envelope Method dialog box, do the following: Select the Faceted Solid Shrinkwrap radio button. Edit the Name to swfac_pcb_env. Edit the Quality Level to 7. Click OK in the Alert dialog box, if necessary. Ensure that Auto Hole Filling is selected. Click OK.
Task 3:
Use the Simplified Rep component chooser to substitute the same envelope into another assembly. . Select HOUSING_FR3.ASM and click Open. from the In Graphics toolbar. Click New on
1. Click Open
2. Click View Manager the Simp Rep tab.
3. Type env_pcb as the Name and press ENTER. 4. In the Edit:ENV_PCB component chooser, do the following: Right-click HOUSING_FR3.ASM and click Set Representation to > Master. Expand ECAD_OPTIC2.ASM and select PCB_OPTIC2.PRT. Scroll to the bottom of the structure tree. Press SHIFT and select LENS_ASSY.PRT. Right-click the selected components and click Substitute > Envelope. In the Select Envelope dialog box, select SWFAC_PCB(ECAD_ OPTIC2) and click OK. Click OK to complete the simplified rep.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Module 9 | Page 15
5. Click Close from the view manager. 6. In the model tree, expand ECAD_OPTIC2.ASM. 7. Right-click SWFAC_PCB <SWFAC_PCB_ENV.PRT> and select Open. 8. From the In Graphics toolbar, select No Hidden from the Display Style types drop-down menu to verify that the faceted envelope part is solid. 9. Select Shading from the Display Style types drop-down menu. 10. From the main toolbar, click File > Manage Session > Erase not displayed.
Fo r
Module 9 | Page 16
PT
In
te rn
There are many components that you can now erase from the session memory because they were substituted by the envelope part.
al
U se
2012 PTC
nl y
Creating and Using an All Solid Surfaces Shrinkwrap Envelope

You can simplify an assembly using an envelope created using the all solid surfaces shrinkwrap method.
All Solid Surfaces Shrinkwrap Envelope: Envelope Part Name Shrinkwrap Component Subset Shrinkwrap Options
te rn
Creating Surface Subset Shrinkwrap Envelopes
Subset The Subset button in the shrinkwrap dashboard opens the Shrinkwrap Comps component chooser. From the component chooser, you can select the components you want included in the creation of the shrinkwrap feature by setting their status to either Ignore or Consider. This option enables you to reduce the number of components included in the creation of the shrinkwrap feature. Options You can use the Options tab to further control the shrinkwrap feature as follows: Fill contours Use the Fill contours option to select planar surfaces intersected by holes or pockets that you want filled during the creation of the shrinkwrap feature. This an excellent method for removing unnecessary geometry copied from complex parts. Solidify resulting geometry This option turns closed surface volumes copied from the referenced subset of components into solid geometry. Leave as quilt if solidification fails If the Solidify resulting geometry option is selected and Creo Parametric cannot create a solid feature, this option determines how Creo Parametric behaves. If selected, the
Fo r
PT
You can create an envelope part and its geometry automatically using the All Solid Surfaces Shrinkwrap method. Using this method, all solid surfaces of a defined component subset are copied into the envelope. The resulting shrinkwrap feature can be simplified and made solid using available options.
In
al
Figure 2 All Solid Shrinkwrap Envelope
U se
nl y
failed geometry remains, but only as surface geometry. If not selected, the shrinkwrap feature fails and no geometry from the failed surface remains. You can only create envelopes using shrinkwrap methods when the master representation is active.
Associative Geometry
Geometry that you create using the All Solid Surfaces Shrinkwrap method is associative to the component geometry that it references. If the referenced components change, geometry in the envelope updates accordingly.
Using Surface Subset Shrinkwrap Envelopes
Fo r
Module 9 | Page 18
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
Like any envelope, you can substitute those you create using the All Solid Surfaces Shrinkwrap method into an assembly's simplified rep using the By Envelope method.
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating and Using an All Solid Surfaces Shrinkwrap Envelope

Close Window Erase Not Displayed Advanced_Assembly\Envelope_Shrinkwrap_All-Solid CAMERA1.ASM Task 1: Create an envelope part using the envelope manager.
3. Click New in the Envelope dialog box.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
4. Within the Envelope Definition component chooser, do the following: Near the top of the component chooser, edit the envelope name ENVLP001 to solid_cam. In the structure tree, select the CAMERA1.ASM check box to include all its components. Click Envelope Part.
al
U se
2. In the Model Display group, click Manage Views and select Envelope . Manager
nl y
Module 9 | Page 19
Including all components of CAMERA1.ASM in the envelope definition means that the entire assembly can be substituted by the envelope. 5. In the Envelope Method dialog box, do the following: Select the All Solid Surfaces Subset Shrinkwrap radio button. Edit the Name to solid_cam_env. Click OK.
Fo r
Module 9 | Page 20
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
6. If the template part MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT is not already displayed in the Copy From field of the Creation Options dialog box, click Browse.... Double-click MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT from the Choose template dialog box. 7. Click OK to close the Creation Options dialog box. 8. If necessary, click OK from the Info dialog box. 9. In the shrinkwrap dashboard, click the Subset button. 10. Within the Shrinkwrap Comps component chooser, do the following: In the structure tree, right-click CAMERA1.ASM and select Ignore. Expand the HOUSING_BTM.ASM and HOUSING_FRONT.ASM nodes. Click the check boxes next to HOUSING_BTM.PRT, HOUSING_TOP.PRT, and HOUSING_FRONT.PRT two times each to set their status to Consider. Click OK.
Fo r
11. On the Options tab of the shrinkwrap dashboard, select Solidify resulting geometry. 12. Right-click in the graphics window and select Fill contours surfaces. 13. Select the surface on HOUSING_FRONT.PRT, as shown.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 9 | Page 21
U se
nl y
14. Spin the model to the position shown. 15. Press CTRL and select the surface on the back of HOUSING_BTM.PRT, as shown. 16. Click Complete Feature . 17. Click OK from the Envelope Definition component chooser.
1. Click Open . Select SECURITYCAM1.ASM and click Open. 2. In the model tree, click Settings > Tree Filters.... 3. Under Display, select the Envelope Components check box.
Fo r
PT
5. In the model tree, expand CAMERA1.ASM. Right-click SOLID_CAM <SOLID_CAM_ENV.PRT>, and select Set Representation to > Use Envelope.
7. On the Simp Rep tab, right-click the modified Master Rep(+) and select Save.... 8. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified Rep field to env_solid_cam and click OK.
9. Click Close from the view manager. 10. In the main toolbar, click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed. There are many components that you can now erase from the session memory because they were substituted by the envelope part. 11. Click OK in the Erase Not Displayed dialog box.
Module 9 | Page 22
In
4. Click OK.
te rn
from the Model Display group.
al
2012 PTC
U se
Task 2:
nl y
18. Click Close
12. From the In Graphics toolbar, select No Hidden from the Display Style types drop-down menu to verify that the faceted envelope part is solid. 13. Edit the model Display Style to Shading .
The black curves on the front and back of the envelope part represent where surface contours were selected to be filled during the shrinkwrap feature creation. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 9 | Page 23
U se
nl y
Creating and Using a Create Features Envelope

You can simplify an assembly using an envelope defined by features created in the context of an assembly.
Create Features Feature control. Features created in the context of the assembly.
Figure 2 Envelope Created using an Extrude feature
With the envelope part activated in the assembly, you can add features to the envelope part in the same way that you would add them to a standard part.
Fo r
Using an Envelope Created Using the Copying an Existing Method

Like any envelope, you can substitute those created using the Create Envelope Part, Create Features method into an assembly's simplified rep.
Module 9 | Page 24
PT
To create an envelope using this method, click Create Envelope Part in the Envelope Method dialog box. Then, click Create features in the Creation Options dialog box.
In
Creating and Using a Create Features Envelope
te rn
al
Figure 3 Finished Envelope
2012 PTC
U se
Figure 1 Full Assembly
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating and Using a Create Features Envelope

Advanced_Assembly\Envelope_Create-Features ECAD_CNTRL.ASM Task 1: Create an envelope part using the envelope manager.
2. From the Model Display group, click Manage Views and select . Envelope Manager 3. Click New... in the Envelope dialog box.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
4. Within the Envelope Definition component chooser, do the following: Near the top of the component chooser, edit the envelope name ENVLP001 to pcb1_btm. In the structure tree, select the ECAD_CNTRL.ASM check box to include all its components. Click Envelope Part.
al
U se
O
Module 9 | Page 25
nl y
5. In the Envelope Method dialog box, do the following: Select the Create Envelope Part radio button. Edit the Name to pcb1_btm_env and click OK. 6. In the Creation Options dialog box, click Create features and click OK. 7. Click Extrude from the Shapes group.
8. In the graphics window, right-click and select Define Internal Sketch. 10. In the Sketch dialog box, select Top from the Orientation drop-down list. Click Flip and then click Sketch. 11. In the References dialog box, click Close. 12. In the Missing References dialog box, click Yes. 13. Click Project from the Sketching group. 14. Click Loop in the Type dialog box.
16. Click OK
to complete the sketch.
17. Click Named Views and select Standard Orientation from the drop-down list.
Fo r
18. Press SHIFT and click the small white, square handle. Drag it to the top surface of TO5.PRT, as shown. to complete the extrude feature.
19. Click Complete Feature 20. Click Done
21. Click OK from the Envelope Definition component chooser. You can add additional features to the envelope at any time. Open the envelope part PCB1_BTM_ENV.PRT and add features, just as you would in any part model. 22. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar.
Module 9 | Page 26
PT
from the Envelope toolbar.
In
15. Select the top surface of PCB_CNTRL.PRT, as shown, and click Accept. This creates sketch entities along the outer edges of the part.
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
9. Select the top most surface of the extruded PCB_CNTRL.PRT.
Task 2:
1. Click Open . Select HOUSING_BTM.ASM and click Open. 2. In the model tree, click Settings > Tree Filters.... 3. Under Display, select the Envelope Components check box. 4. Click OK. 5. In the model tree, expand ECAD_CNTRL.ASM. Right-click PCB1_BTM <PCB1_BTM_ENV.PRT> and select Set Representation to > Use Envelope.
7. On the Simp Rep tab, right-click the modified Master Rep(+) and select Save....
9. Click Close in the view manager.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
10. In the main toolbar, click File > Manage Session > Erase not displayed. There are many components that you can now erase from session memory because they were substituted by the envelope part.
In
8. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified Rep field to simple_pcb1 and click OK.
te rn
6. In the main window, click View Manager group.
al
U se
from the Model Display
Module 9 | Page 27
nl y
Creating and Using an Envelope Copied from an Existing Part

You can simplify an assembly using an envelope created by copying an existing part.
Copy From Existing Quick and Easy Non-Associative
Creating and Using an Envelope Copied from an Existing Part
Non-Associative Copy
Fo r
The copied envelope part is not associative to the existing model from which it was copied. A change to the original model does not update the envelope part.
Using an Envelope Created Using the Copying an Existing Method

Like any envelope, you can substitute those that you create using the Copying an Existing method into an assemblys simplified rep.
Module 9 | Page 28
PT
To create an envelope using this method, click Create Envelope Part in the Envelope Method dialog box. Then, click Copy from Existing in the Creation Options dialog box. You can then browse to select the model you want to copy.
In
You can quickly create an envelope part by copying an existing model. You can then define the envelope geometry by editing dimensions and inserting or deleting features that were copied to the envelope part.
te rn
al
Figure 2 Envelope Copied From Existing
U se
O
2012 PTC
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating and Using an Envelope Copied from an Existing Part

Close Window Erase Not Displayed ECAD_OPTIC.ASM
Advanced_Assembly\Envelope_Copy Task 1:
Create an envelope part using the Component Create dialog box.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Click Create from the Component group.
4. Within the Envelope Definition component chooser, do the following: In the structure tree, click the check box next to ECAD_OPTIC.ASM to include all its components. Click Envelope Part.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 9 | Page 29
U se
3. In the Component Create dialog box, click Envelope. Type pcb2 in the Name field and click OK.
nl y
5. In the Envelope Method dialog box, click Create Envelope Part. Edit the name to pcb2_env and click OK. 6. In the Creation Options dialog box, click Copy from Existing and then click Browse.... 7. In the Choose template dialog box, select PCB_OPTIC.PRT and click Open. 8. Click OK in the Creation Options dialog box. 9. Click Csys Display to enable the coordinate system display.
10. In both models, select ECAD_DEFAULT as component and assembly references, as shown. 12. Click OK from the Envelope Definition component chooser. 13. Click Csys Display 14. Click Close .
to disable the coordinate system display.
Task 2:
Edit the envelope part.
1. Click Open
PT
. Then click In Session
In
te rn
in the Open dialog box.
Fo r
2. Select PCB2_ENV.PRT and click Open. This is the envelope part you just created by copying the design model PCB_OPTIC.PRT.
3. In the model tree, right-click Protrusion id 39 and select Edit. 4. Edit the dimension 1.575 to 6.575 and click twice in the graphics window to update the geometry. 5. Click Extrude from the Shapes group.
Module 9 | Page 30
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
6. In the model tree, select datum plane FRONT as the sketch plane. 7. Sketch and dimension a circle, as shown. 8. Click OK sketch. to complete the
9. Edit the depth to 19.5 and click Complete Feature .
Task 3:
Use the model tree to substitute the envelope into an assembly. . Select HOUSING_FRONT.ASM and click Open.
1. Click Open
3. Under Display, select the Envelope Components check box. Click OK.
In
4. In the model tree, expand ECAD_OPTIC.ASM. Right click PCB2 <PCB2_ENV.PRT> and select Set Representation to > Use Envelope. 5. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar.
6. On the Simp Rep tab, right-click the modified Master Rep(+) and select Save....
Fo r
7. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified Rep field to simple_pcb and click OK.
8. Click Close in the view manager. 9. In the main toolbar, click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2012 PTC
PT
te rn
al
U se
> Tree Filters....
O
Module 9 | Page 31
nl y
There are many components that you can now erase from the session memory because they were substituted by the envelope part. 10. Click OK in the Erase Not Displayed dialog box. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
Module 9 | Page 32
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Substituting Components using User Defined

You can substitute a component with any of its custom simplified reps using the User Defined option.
Substituting Components using User Defined
In the structure tree, right-click the component you want to substitute and click Set Representation to > User Defined. Select the rep you want to use in the Select Rep dialog box and click Apply.
Fo r
From the model tree, use the following steps to substitute a component using one of its simplified reps: In the model tree, right-click the component you want to substitute and click Set Representation to > User Defined. Select the rep you want to use in the Select Rep dialog box and click Apply. You can only substitute custom simplified reps and the Default Rep in a simplified rep. You cannot substitute the standard Symbolic, Geometry, and Graphics reps.
2012 PTC
PT
You can also select the Status field next to a component and select User Defined from the drop-down list.
In
te rn
The component chooser opens when you create a new simplified rep or redefine an existing rep in the view manager. In the component chooser, use the following steps to substitute a component using the User Defined option:
al
You can automatically substitute a component of an assembly with any of the component's custom simplified reps using the User Defined option.
U se
Figure 1 Assembly
Figure 2 Substituted Simplified Reps
nl y
Module 9 | Page 33
PROCEDURE - Substituting Components using User Defined

Close Window Erase Not Displayed CAMERA1.ASM
Advanced_Assembly\Substitute_User-Defined Task 1:
Create a simplified rep that substitutes sub-assemblies with simplified reps.
3. Type simple_camera as the Name and press ENTER.
Fo r
Module 9 | Page 34
PT
In
te rn
4. In the Edit:SIMPLE_CAMERA component chooser, do the following: Right-click CAMERA1.ASM and click Set Representation to > Master. Right-click HOUSING_ BTM.ASM and click Set Representation to > User Defined. Select SIMPLE_PCB in the SELECT REP dialog box and click Apply. Click OK to complete the simplified rep.
al
U se
O
2012 PTC
2. From the In Graphics toolbar, click View Manager the Simp Rep tab.
nl y
. Click New on
Task 2:
Use the model tree to substitute another sub-assembly.
1. In the model tree, right-click HOUSING_FRONT.ASM and click Set Representation to > User Defined.
2. In the SELECT REP dialog box, select SIMPLE_PCB1 and click Apply. A simplified rep containing a faceted solid is substituted into the assembly.
3. In the view manager, double-click Simple_Camera(+) to reset the modified simplified rep. 4. In the model tree, right-click HOUSING_FRONT.ASM and click Set Representation to > User Defined.
Fo r
5. In the SELECT REP dialog box, select SIMPLE_PCB2 and click Apply. 6. In the view manager, right-click Simple_Camera(+) and select Save.... 7. Click OK in the Save Display Elements dialog box.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 9 | Page 35
U se
nl y
8. Click Close in the view manager. 9. In the main toolbar, click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed. Many of the components are removed from the session memory when you select to substitute simple objects for the two detailed PCB assemblies. This increases system performance. 10. Click OK in the Erase Not Displayed dialog box.
Fo r
Module 9 | Page 36
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Substituting by Interchange and Family Table

You can substitute components related by a family table or interchange assembly in a simplified rep.
Substitute by: Interchange Family Table
te rn PT C In Fo r
Figure 2 Substitute by Interchange
2012 PTC
Substituting by Interchange and Family Table

You can substitute components into a simplified rep using the Interchange and Family Table options. These options enable you to automatically substitute any components related by family table or interchange assembly. The component chooser opens when you create a new simplified rep or redefine an existing rep in the view manager. In the component chooser, use the following steps to substitute a component by Interchange or Family Table: In the component chooser, right-click the component you want to substitute. Select Substitute and then select either Interchange or Family Table.
al
Figure 1 Full Assembly Figure 3 Substitute by Family Table
Module 9 | Page 37
U se
nl y
In the Family Tree dialog box, select the interchange component or family table instance that you want to substitute and click OK. You can also select the Status field next to a component, and then select Substitute by Interchange or Substitute by Family Table from the drop-down list.
Fo r
Module 9 | Page 38
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Substituting by Interchange and Family Table

Advanced_Assembly\Substitute_Interchange_Family-Table SECURITYCAM1.ASM Task 1: Substitute the camera assembly with a simplified part model.
2. From the in Graphics toolbar, click View Manager . Click New on the Simp Rep tab. 3. Type solid_camera as the Name and press ENTER.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
4. In the Edit:SOLID_CAMERA component chooser, do the following: Right-click SECURITYCAM1.ASM and select Set Representation to > Master. Right-click CAMERA1.ASM and select Substitute > Interchange. In the Family Tree dialog box, expand CAMERA1_INTCHG.ASM. Select CAMERA_LIGHT.PRT and click OK. Click OK to complete the simplified rep.
al
U se
O
Module 9 | Page 39
nl y
Task 2:
Verify that the sub-assembly was substituted with the solid part.
1. In the view manager, select the Sections tab. 2. Double-click cross-section A. In this simplified rep, CAMERA1.ASM has been substituted by a single solid part model.
Task 3:
Substitute a simplified thumb nut to reduce detail in the rep.
Fo r
Module 9 | Page 40
PT
In
te rn
3. Select the Simp Rep tab, right-click Solid_Camera, and select Redefine.
al
2012 PTC
2. Spin and zoom the model so that you can see the slotted geometry of THUMB_NUT_M6X1.PRT.
U se
1. Double-click cross-section No Cross Section on the Sections tab of the view manager.
nl y
4. In the Edit:SOLID_CAMERA component chooser, do the following: In the structure tree, expand the ARM1.ASM node. Right-click THUMB_NUT_M6X1.PRT and select Substitute > Family Table. In the Family Tree dialog box, select THUMB_NUT_M6X1_SIMPLE and click OK. Click OK to complete the simplified rep.
5. Click Close in the view manager. 6. Spin and zoom the model to verify the slotted THUMB_NUT_M6X1.PRT was substituted.
Fo r
7. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed. In the Erase Not Displayed dialog box, notice all the components that you can now erase from the session memory because they were substituted by the single parts.
8. Click OK in the Erase Not Displayed dialog box. This completes the procedure.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 9 | Page 41
U se
nl y
Fo r
Module 9 | Page 42
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
10
U se O nl y
Understanding Advanced Simplified Rep Functionality

Module Overview
Once you have learned the basics of simplified representations, you can utilize advanced functionality to define simplified reps by rules based on model size, location or proximity to other components. You can also manage on-demand simplified rep options and create external reps.
Objectives
Fo r
After completing this module, you will be able to: Search for components in simplified reps. Create simplified reps based on model size. Create simplified reps using zones. Create simplified reps based on distance. Create simplified reps using exterior components. Define simplified reps using rules. Utilize on-demand simplified reps. Create external simplified reps.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 10 | Page 1
Searching for Components for Simplified Reps

You can use the Search tool to automate the selection of components referenced in a simplified rep.
Using the Search Tool Attributes History Status Geometry
Figure 1 Save Rule as Layer
Figure 2 Search Attributes
One time Search Use the Search tool to select components and exclude or edit their representation. Saved Search A search is saved as a layer with an embedded rule. Once the search is saved to a layer containing the search rule, components are added/removed automatically from the layer based on the rule. You can then select all the components on the layer and exclude or edit their representation. You can also build a compound search. Selecting Build Query from the Options drop-down list enables you to add multiple queries to the search. This enables you to narrow down the search results by combining multiple searches together with AND/OR operators.
Fo r
Search Criteria
With the Search tool, you can search using various criteria, including the following. Note that depending on the search type, you may need to edit the settings to look for components or solid models accordingly. Attributes
PT
When creating simplified reps on a large assembly, the selection of components for a particular rep can often be the most tedious task. You can use the Search tool to automate this task in the following two ways:
In
Searching for Components for Simplified Reps
te rn
al
Figure 3 Search Geometry
U se
nl y
Fo r
Name Search for components by name. You can use wildcards such as asterisk (*) to select multiple similarly named components. For example, you can search for BOLT* or *BOLT to locate all components with names starting or ending with the text BOLT. Type Search for components by type. For example, you can search for an assembly to locate sub-assemblies, or you could search for Bulk Items, Parts, or Skeletons. Expression Search for components by matching a parameter expression. For example, if all components have a parameter for material, you can select all components that have ALUM as the value for the material parameter. Size Search for solid models by size. The system can locate components based on their absolute or relative physical size. History ID Search for a component with a particular component ID number. Number Search for components with a specified component number or range. Status Regeneration Search for components that are frozen, child of frozen, failed, packaged, suppressed, and so on. Layer Search for components on a particular name layer. Display Search for solid models that are on a particular simplified rep, style state, or are currently hidden. Parent/Child Search for solid models that are parents or children of a selected component. Options are available to limit the scope and extent of the parent/child relationship. Copied Refs Search for components that have copied references that are edited to a selected status. Geometry Zone Search for components or solid models that are inside or outside a defined zone. Distance Search for components or solid models within a distance from a reference. Exterior Comps Search for components or solid models that are on the exterior of an assembly.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Module 10 | Page 3
PROCEDURE - Searching for Components for Simplified Reps

Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Search DRILL_SEARCH.ASM Task 1: Search for all bolts in the assembly.
2. In the ribbon, select the Tools tab. 3. Click Find from the Investigate group. 4. Select Component from the Look for drop-down list.
7. In the Value field, type BOLT*. 8. Click Find Now. Creo Parametric finds and lists 32 models meeting this criteria.
9. Click in the found items field and cursor over the found items to highlight them.
Task 2:
Fo r
1. In the Search Tool:1 dialog box, click the New Search button. 2. Click the Options button and select Build Query, if necessary. 3. In the Value field, type BOLT_4* and click Add New. 4. In the Value field, type BOLT_6* and click Add New. An OR operator is placed between the two rules in the query.
Module 10 | Page 4
PT
Bolts with varying lengths and diameters of 4 mm, 5 mm, and 6 mm have been found. Build a query to find bolts of specific sizes.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
6. Ensure that the Comparison criteria is equal to has been selected from the drop-down list.
U se
5. On the Attributes tab, ensure that Name is the selected rule.
nl y
5. Click Find Now. 6. Select the listed items and click . Add Item 7. Click Close. 14 bolts with 4 mm or 6 mm diameters are found. Task 3: Create a simplified rep by excluding components from the query.
1. With the bolts still selected, right-click and select Set Representation to > Exclude. 2. Start the View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar.
4. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified Rep field to no_bolt_4_6 and click OK.
3. In the Value field, type BOLT_5* and click Find Now.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
4. Press CTRL+A to select the 18 items found.
In
from the 2. Click Find Investigate group.
te rn
1. Double-click Master Rep to activate it.
al
Module 10 | Page 5
Task 4:
Save queried components to a layer.
U se
3. Right-click Master Rep(+) and select Save.
nl y
5. In the Search Tool:1 dialog box, click Options > Save Query. 6. In the Save Rules dialog box, type no_bolt_5 and click OK. 7. Click Close in the Search Tool:1 dialog box and Close from the view manager. 8. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 9. Click Layers from the Visibility group. 10. Expand the NO_BOLT_5 layer to see the bolts that have been added to it by the query. 12. In the graphics area, right-click and select Set Representation to > Exclude. 13. Start the View Manager .
15. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified Rep field to no_bolt_5 and click OK. 16. Double-click Master Rep and click Close.
Fo r
Module 10 | Page 6
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
14. Right-click Master Rep(+) and select Save.
nl y
11. Right-click the layer and select Select Items.
Creating Simplified Reps by Size

You can use the Search tool to select components to be referenced in a simplified rep based on size.
Bounding Box Size Type: Relative (0-1) Absolute (value) Comparison: Equal to (=) , Not equal to (), Greater than (>), Less than (<) Greater than or equal to (), Less than or equal to () Include All Models
Figure 1 Bounding Box
Figure 2 Relative Size
te rn
Creating Simplified Reps by Size

You can create a simplified rep by selecting models based on their size. Once you search for and select Solid Models using the Search tool, you can exclude these models or edit their representation. For example, you can select all components above or below a particular size and then exclude them all at once in a simplified rep.
Fo r
Model Size
To determine a models size, the system uses the same calculation as the Model Size functionality on the Analysis tab. This analysis places the smallest rectangular bounding box that completely encompasses the model. Note that all model geometry is considered, whether it is solid or non-solid. The system then measures the length of the 3-D diagonal across the bounding box. The length of this diagonal, in current model units, is used as the size of the model.
Size Type
When searching by size, there are two size types, Relative and Absolute. The Relative option searches for models using a percentage scale. For example, a relative value of 0.15 can locate all models that are 15% of the overall assembly size. The Absolute option searches for models using a value. For example, typing a value of 150 can locate all models that are 150 model units. For each size search, you can specify one of the following comparisons:
PT
In
al
Figure 3 Absolute Size
U se
nl y
Equal to Not equal to Greater than Less than Greater than or equal to Less than or equal to
Fo r
Module 10 | Page 8
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
You can also use the Include All Models option to search within sub-assemblies.
Include All Models
nl y
You can also build a compound size search. For example, if you need to select all models that are greater than 100 and less than 150, you can perform an initial search for models greater than 100, and then use the Build Query option to search within the results for models less than 150. Additionally, you can toggle the compound operator to either AND or OR.
PROCEDURE - Creating Simplified Reps by Size

Close Window Erase Not Displayed DRILL_SIZE.ASM
Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Size Task 1: Search for components of a relative size.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the ribbon, select the Tools tab. 3. Click Find from the Investigate group. 4. Select Solid Model from the Look for drop-down list, if necessary. 6. Ensure that Relative is selected from the Type drop-down list. 7. Select is less than from the Comparison drop-down list. 8. In the Value field, type 0.15 and ensure that the Include All Models check box is cleared. 9. Click Find Now. Creo Parametric finds and lists 53 solid models meeting this criteria.
11. Click Add Item Close.
PT
The solid models found are mostly bolts and other small components. and click
Fo r
Task 2:
Create a simplified rep by excluding the found components.
1. With the found models still selected, right-click and select Set Representation to > Exclude. 2. Start the View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar. 3. Right-click Master Rep(+) and select Save.
2012 PTC
In
10. Press CTRL+A to highlight all found items.
te rn
al
Module 10 | Page 9
U se
5. On the Attributes tab, select Size as the rule.
nl y
4. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Simplified Rep field to no_less_15_percent and click OK. 5. In the view manager, double-click Master Rep. Leave the view manager open. Task 3: Create a simplified rep by excluding components from the query. from the Investigate group.
1. Click Find
3. Select is greater than from the Comparison drop-down list. 4. Ensure that the Value field is still 0.15 and click Add New. 5. Select is less than from the Comparison drop-down list. 7. Click Find Now. Notice 80 items have been found. 8. Click on the or operator and select and. 10. Press CTRL+A, click Add Item 11. Right-click and select Set Representation to > Exclude.
14. Double-click Master Rep.
Fo r
Task 4:
1. In the ribbon, select the Tools tab. 2. Click Model Size from the Investigate group. Select DRILL_SIZE.ASM from the model tree. Notice the overall size is approximately 700 mm. 3. Click Repaint from the In Graphics toolbar.
Module 10 | Page 10
PT
13. Edit the Simplified Rep field to no_1550_percent and click OK.
Save queried components to a layer.
In
12. In the view manager, right-click Master Rep(+) and select Save.
te rn
al
9. Click Find Now. Notice 19 items have now been found. , and then click Close.
U se
2012 PTC
6. In the Value field, type 0.50 and click Add New.
nl y
2. If necessary, click Options and activate Build Query. This is not necessary if the Query Builder field is already open.
4. In the ribbon, select the Tools tab. 5. Click Find from the Investigate group. 6. Select Absolute from the Type drop-down list. 7. Ensure is greater than is selected from the Comparison drop-down list. 8. In the Value field, type 120 and click Find Now. 9. Press CTRL+A to select the 21 found items. Click Add Item click Close. 10. Right-click, and click Set Representation to > Exclude. 11. In the view manager, right-click Master Rep(+) and select Save. 12. Edit the Simplified Rep field to no_larger_120 and click OK. 13. Double-click Master Rep and click Close. This completes the procedure. and
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 10 | Page 11
al
U se
nl y
Creating Simplified Reps using Zones

You can use zones to select components to be referenced in a simplified rep.
Searching by Zone: Inside Zones Outside Zones Zone Types: Half-Space Inside-Outside Radial Distance Offset Csys
Figure 1 Offset Csys Zone
Figure 2 Half-Space Zone
Fo r
When searching for solid models, a component is selected if any solid geometry is within or is crossing the zone boundary. When searching for components, a component is selected if any solid or non-solid geometry (datum feature, for example) is within or crossing the zone boundary.
Zone Types
Zones are created and managed as a type of cross-section within the view manager. You can create the following four types of zones: Half-Space You define this type of zone by selecting a datum plane or planar surface as a reference. You can then flip the direction of the zone to be on either side of the reference. An example of this type of zone is shown in the lower left figure. The zone direction is illustrated by the arrows. Inside-Outside You define this type of zone by selecting an enclosed surface quilt as a reference. You can then flip the direction of the zone to be on the inside or outside of the quilt (not shown). Radial Distance From You define this type of zone by selecting a vertex or datum point or coordinate system as a reference. You then specify a
PT
You can search for components or solid models inside or outside a defined zone. Once selected, you can exclude them or edit their representation with a simplified rep.
In
Creating Simplified Reps using Zones
te rn
al
Figure 3 Radial Distance Zone
U se
nl y
distance value to define a spherical zone. An example of this type of zone is shown in the lower right figure. Offset Csys You define this type of zone by selecting a coordinate system as a reference. You then define a rectangular zone by typing positive or negative (+/-) values for the X, Y, and Z directions. An example of this type of zone is shown in the upper right figure. You can also build compound zones by defining multiple zones and then linking them with AND/OR statements. For example, you can create a zone by selecting two parallel planes as half-space references. You can then define the zone to include all components on the positive side of the first plane AND all the components on the negative side of the second plane, thereby selecting all components between the planes.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 10 | Page 13
al
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Simplified Reps using Zones

Close Window Erase Not Displayed DRILL_ZONE.ASM
Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Zone Task 1:
Search for components in a Radial Distance From zone. .
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. In the model tree, click Settings
3. In the Display section, select the Features check box and click OK. 4. Click View Manager Sections tab.
6. Select Radial Distance From from the drop-down list. 7. Select Point from the From drop-down list. Type 90 as the Radius and press ENTER.
8. Select datum point APNT0 from the model.
10. In the ribbon, select the Tools tab.
Fo r
11. Click Find
12. In the Look for drop-down list, select Solid Model, if necessary. 13. On the Geometry tab, ensure Zone is the selected rule.
14. Ensure that Inside the zone is selected from the Comparison drop-down list. 15. Ensure that Zone1 is selected from the Value drop-down list, and select the Show Selected Zones check box. 16. Click Find Now. 17. Press CTRL+A to select the 14 items. Click Add Item Close. and click
18. With the found models still selected, right-click, and click Set Representation to > Exclude.
Module 10 | Page 14
PT
Radial Distance zones cannot display a clipped cut if they are set to active.
from the Investigate group.
In
9. Click Accept Settings click Close.
te rn
and
al
2012 PTC
U se
5. Click New > Zone, type zone1, and press ENTER.
from the In Graphics toolbar and select the
nl y
> Tree Filters....
19. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar. On the Simp Rep tab, right-click Master Rep(+) and select Save. 20. Edit the Simplified Rep field to exclude_zone1 and click OK. 21. In the view manager, double-click Master Rep and leave the view manager open. Task 2: Search for components in an Offset Csys zone.
2. Select Offset CSYS from the drop-down list. 3. Select CSYS from the model tree. 4. Edit the offset values as follows: X1: 35 Y1: 50 Z1: 55 X2: 35 Y2: 25 Z2: 200
7. Click Preview Display 8. Click Accept Settings click Close.
PT
6. If required, click Change to ensure that Orientation the zone is labeled as Inside. . and
Fo r
9. Click Find
10. Select Zone2 from the Value drop-down list and select the Show Selected Zones check box. 11. Click Find Now. and click
12. Press CTRL+A to select the 15 items. Click Add Item Close.
13. With the found models still selected, right-click, and select Set Representation to > Exclude.
2012 PTC
In
5. With your cursor in the Z2 field, press ENTER.
from the Investigate group.
te rn
Module 10 | Page 15
al
U se
1. Select the Sections tab and click New > Zone. Type zone2 and press ENTER.
nl y
from
15. Select the Simp Rep tab, right-click Master Rep(+), and select Save. 16. Edit the Simplified Rep field to exclude_zone2 and click OK. 17. In the view manager, double-click Master Rep and click Close. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
Module 10 | Page 16
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Creating Simplified Reps by Distance

You can select components that are a specified distance from a selected reference to be included in a simplified rep.
Comparison: Less than Greater than Value Reference: Point/Vtx Csys And so on
Figure 2 Radial Distance
Fo r
When searching for components, a component is selected if any solid or non-solid geometry (datum feature, for example) is within or crossing the distance value. Once you search for and select components or solid models using the Search tool, you can exclude these models or edit their representation. For example, you can select all components within a particular radius and then exclude them all at once in a simplified rep. This type of Search is defined by selecting a vertex or datum point or coordinate system as a reference. Then, you specify a distance value to define a spherical radius. You can also select all components within or outside of the sphere.
2012 PTC
PT
When searching for solid models, a component is selected if any solid geometry is within or is crossing the distance value.
You can create a simplified rep by selecting models based on their distance from a reference.
In
Creating Simplified Reps by Distance
te rn
al
U se
Figure 1 Search by Distance
Module 10 | Page 17
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Simplified Reps by Distance

Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Distance DRILL_DIST.ASM Task 1: Search for components in a Radial Distance From zone.
1. Enable only the following Datum 2. In the ribbon, select the Tools tab. from the 3. Click Find Investigate group. 4. In the Look for drop-down list, select Solid Model, if necessary. 5. On the Geometry tab, select Distance as the rule. 6. Select Point from the Type drop-down list.
7. Pre-select the reference datum point APNT0 from the model, and then select it. 8. Ensure that is less than is selected from the Comparison drop-down list. 9. Edit the Value field to 75 and press ENTER. 10. Click Find Now.
Fo r
11. Press CTRL+A to select the six items in the list. and click
Module 10 | Page 18
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Display types:
Task 2:
Create a simplified rep by setting the status of found models to master.
1. With the found models still selected, right-click, and select Set Representation to > Master. 2. Start the View Manager . On the Simp Rep tab, right-click Master Rep(+) and select Save. 3. Edit the Simplified Rep field to include_dist_handle and click OK. 4. In the view manager, double-click Master Rep and click Close. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 10 | Page 19
al
U se
nl y
Creating Simplified Reps using Exterior Components

You can create a simplified rep by selecting models based on their location relative to the exterior of an assembly.
Comparison: Equal to Not equal to Quality Level: 110
Figure 2 Quality Level of 2
Once you search for and select components or solid models using the Search tool, you can exclude these models or edit their representation. For example, you can select all components on the exterior of an assembly and then exclude them all at once in a simplified rep. This type of search is defined by selecting a comparison type and a quality level. Comparison The comparison determines whether the search locates the exterior components and then selects them, or selects components that are not the exterior components. Using this option effectively enables you to select exterior or interior components. Quality Level There is a 110 quality level setting that determines how thoroughly the system searches for exterior components. In the figures, you can see the complete assembly and two representations simplified by adjusting the quality level. The representation containing the fewest components was created using a quality level of 4. The representation containing more components illustrates the exterior components excluded using a quality level of 2.
Fo r
PT
When searching for solid models, only solid geometry is considered in the calculation. When searching for components, both solid and non-solid geometry (datum features, for example) are considered in the calculation.
You can create a simplified rep by selecting models based on their assembled location relative to the outside (or exterior) of an assembly.
In
Creating Simplified Reps using Exterior Components
te rn
al
Figure 3 Quality Level of 4
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Simplified Reps using Exterior Components

Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Exterior DRILL_EXT.ASM Task 1: Search for exterior components of the assembly.
2. In the ribbon, select the Tools tab. 3. Click Find from the Investigate group.
4. From the Look for drop-down list, select Solid Model, if necessary. 6. Ensure that is equal to is selected from the Comparison drop-down list. 7. Select 4 from the Value (Quality Level) drop-down list.
9. Click Find Now.
Task 2:
Fo r
1. With the found models still selected, right-click and select Set Representation to > Exclude. 2. Start the View Manager . On the Simp Rep tab, right-click Master Rep(+) and select Save. 3. Edit the Simplified Rep field to no_exterior and click OK. 4. Double-click Master Rep and click Close.
2012 PTC
PT
Create a simplified rep by excluding the exterior models.
In
10. Press CTRL+A to select the 45 items in the list. and click
te rn
Module 10 | Page 21
8. Click OK in the Exterior Comps dialog box.
al
U se
5. On the Geometry tab, ensure Exterior Comps is the selected rule.
nl y
Task 3:
Search for components not on the exterior of the assembly. from the Investigate group.
1. Click Find
2. Ensure that Solid Model is selected from the Look for drop-down list. 3. Ensure that Exterior Comps is selected as the rule. 4. Select is not equal to from the Comparison drop-down list.
6. Press CTRL+A to select the 25 items in the list. 7. Click Add Item Close. Task 4: and click
Create a simplified rep by excluding the interior models.
Fo r
Module 10 | Page 22
PT
4. Double-click Master Rep and click Close.
3. Edit the Simplified Rep field to no_interior and click OK.
In
2. Start the View Manager . On the Simp Rep tab, right-click Master Rep(+) and select Save.
te rn
1. With the found models still selected, right-click and select Set Representation to > Exclude.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
5. With the Quality Level still at 4, click Find Now.
Defining Simplified Reps using Rules

You can use rules to automatically search for, select, and perform an action on components in a simplified rep.
Model Rules: Evaluate Rules Edit Rules Rule Condition:
Rule Action: Exclude Master Rep Geometry Rep Graphics Rep
Defining Simplified Reps using Rules

Within a simplified rep, you can configure rule actions that automatically search for, select, and perform an action on components. If components are added or removed from the assembly, you can return to the rule actions and update the rule. You can also create multiple rules within a simplified rep. If rules attempt an action on the same component, the latest rule in the list overrides an earlier rule. You can also reorder the rules within the Rule Actions list. Within the simplified rep component chooser, you can create or edit rule conditions by clicking Model Rules > Edit Rules. To evaluate rules that already exist in the simplified rep, click Model Rules > Evaluate Rules. Each rule action consists of a rep action and a condition. When creating a condition, the Rule Editor dialog box appears. The Rule Editor dialog box is nearly identical to the Search tool, except that the resulting search rule is executed inside the simplified rep. Like the Search tool, you can also build a compound rule. Selecting Build Query from the Options drop-down list enables you to add multiple queries to the search. This enables you to narrow down the search results by combining multiple searches together with AND/OR operators.
Fo r
Conditions
To define the condition, the rule editor enables you to search using various criteria, including the following. Note that depending on the search type, you may need to edit the settings to search for components or solid models accordingly.
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
Figure 1 Rule Conditions
nl y
Rule Editor Similar to Search tool
Fo r
Attributes Name Search for components by name. You can use wildcards such as asterisk (*) to select multiple similarly named components. For example, you can search for BOLT* or *BOLT to locate all components with names starting or ending with the text BOLT. Type Search for components by type. For example, you can search for an assembly to locate sub-assemblies, or you can search for bulk items, parts, or skeletons. Expression Search for components by matching a parameter expression. For example, if all components have a parameter for material, you can select all components that have ALUM as the value for the material parameter. Size Search for solid models by size. The system can locate components based on their absolute or relative physical size. History ID Search for a component with a particular component ID number. Number Search for components with a specified component number or range. Status Regeneration Search for components that are frozen, child of frozen, failed, packaged, suppressed, and so on. Layer Search for components on a particular name layer. Display Search for solid models that are on a particular simplified rep, style state, or are currently hidden. Parent/Child Search for solid models that are parents or children of a selected component. Options are available to limit the scope and extent of the parent/child relation. Copied Refs Search for components that have copied references that are edited to a selected status. Geometry Zone Search for components or solid models that are inside or outside a defined zone. Distance Select items based on their distance from another item. Exterior Comps Search for components or solid models that are on the exterior of an assembly.
Rep Actions
After you define the condition (search rule), you can select a rep action to be performed automatically on the results of the search. Common rep actions include the following: Exclude The components selected by the rule are edited to Exclude in the simplified rep. Master Rep The components selected by the rule are edited to Master Rep in the simplified rep. Geometry Rep The components selected by the rule are edited to Geometry Rep in the simplified rep.
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Graphics Rep The components selected by the rule are edited to Graphics Rep in the simplified rep.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 10 | Page 25
al
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Defining Simplified Reps using Rules

Close Window Erase Not Displayed DRILL_RULE. ASM
Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_Rules
Task 1:
Create a simplified rep using rules.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. from the In Graphics toolbar. On the Simp 2. Click View Manager Rep tab, click New. Type no-bolts_no-ext and press ENTER.
Click Add Condition . Right-click Select condition and select New. Edit the rule name Cond0001 to bolts, then middle-click. 5. In the Rule Editor:1 dialog box, do the following: Ensure Solid Model is selected from the Look for drop-down list. On the Attributes tab, ensure Name is the selected rule. Ensure that is equal to is selected from the Comparison drop-down list. In the Value field, type BOLT*. Click OK.
Fo r
6. In the NO-BOLTS_NO-EXT dialog box, do the following: Click Add Condition . Right-click Select condition and select New. Edit the rule name Cond0001 to exterior, then middle-click.
Module 10 | Page 26
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
4. In the NO-BOLTS_NO-EXT dialog box, do the following:
3. Click Model Rules > Edit Rules from the Edit:NO-BOLTS_NO-EXT component chooser.
nl y
9. In the Edit:NO-BOLTS_NO-EXT component chooser, do the following: Right-click DRILL_RULE.ASM and click Set Representation to > Master. Click Model Rules > Evaluate Rules. Click OK to complete the simplified rep.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 10 | Page 27
8. In the NO-BOLTS_NO-EXT dialog box, ensure that the Rep Action for both rules is set to Exclude and then click OK.
al
U se
The Confirm Evaluation dialog box warns you that, because you are working in a simplified rep with excluded components, you may need to bring additional models into session to perform the evaluation.
nl y
7. In the Rule Editor:1 dialog box, do the following: Select the Geometry tab, then select Exterior Comps as the rule. Ensure that is equal to is selected from the Comparison drop-down list. Select 4 from the Value (Quality Level) drop-down list. Click OK in the Exterior Comps dialog box. Click Preview Results and click OK in the Confirm Evaluation dialog box. Press CTRL+A to select the 53 items in the list and click OK. Click OK in the Confirm Evaluation dialog box.
Task 2:
Assemble a bolt in the NO-BOLTS_NO-EXT simplified rep.
1. In the ribbon, click Assemble from the Component group. Select BOLT_2_5-12.PRT and click Open. 2. Assemble the bolt to the hole, as shown in the figure. 3. Click Complete Component .
5. Click Close. Because the rules are re-evaluated, the BOLT_2_5-12.PRT is excluded from the simplified rep, along with all the other bolt models. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
Module 10 | Page 28
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
4. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar. On the Simp Rep tab, click Edit > Evaluate Model Rules
nl y
Using On-Demand Simplified Reps

On-demand functionality enables you to work with a minimum amount of model data and automatically retrieve and remove additional design data as required.
On-Demand Retrieval Settings: Prompt Never prompt Disable
Typically, when an assembly component is excluded from a simplified representation, it cannot be seen or selected. When the same component is edited to a geometry rep, its geometry is available to be selected for assembly or measurements, but the component's features are not available for selection or modification. Furthermore, if the same component is edited to a graphics rep, the component is visible but geometry and features are not available for selection.
Fo r
On-demand functionality can manage the representation levels of components automatically, thereby improving system performance. On-demand functionality enables you to work with a minimum amount of model data and automatically retrieve and remove additional design data as required. You can control on-demand settings in the following ways: Specify whether and when to retrieve components not completely included in a simplified representation. Retrieve master or geometry representations of components currently in a non-editable rep such as a graphics rep. Define the conditions under which the on-demand simplified representations update dynamically. Enable or disable dynamic updating. Retrieve and erase components that you need to reference temporarily while you are working.
2012 PTC
PT
Before the introduction of on-demand functionality, if you had a component that was edited to a graphics or geometry rep, you had to manually edit the representation of that component to a rep suitable to the given task.
In
te rn
al
Using On-Demand Simplified Reps
U se
Activation Regeneration Selection Editing Cleanup
Figure 1 On-Demand Settings
O
Module 10 | Page 29
nl y
Other On-Demand Settings:
On-Demand Retrieval Settings

There are three modes of operation for on-demand retrieval: Prompt A confirmation is required before on-demand retrieval. Never prompt (the default) Models are retrieved without confirmation. Disable On-demand retrieval is disabled. You can also retrieve back up references. You can select the Retrieve Backed Up References option to retrieve the original model of any backed-up references. Upon retrieval, the backed-up references are updated to reflect edits in the original models.
Other On-Demand Settings
Activation On-Demand Activation Retrieve the master representation for activating a component. Regeneration On-Demand Regeneration Retrieve parent components in a higher representation level upon model regeneration. Automatic or Master Enable automatic selection of the representation type to retrieve, or you can retrieve all models in their master representation. Selection On-Demand Selection Retrieve components in a higher representation level for selecting internal items. Automatic or Master Select the models to retrieve. Editing On-Demand Editing Retrieve simplified components and their parents in a higher representation level for editing purposes. Automatic, Master, or Master with Ancestors Select models to retrieve when editing. Cleanup On-Demand Cleanup Remove unmodified simplified representations retrieved on-demand. Restore and Restore Representation and Erase Maintain removed models in session or erase retrieved models from session.
Fo r
Module 10 | Page 30
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
There are several additional settings for on-demand reps, which are organized into the following categories:
nl y
2012 PTC
Memory Management
In some cases components that are retrieved using on-demand reps may remain in memory. To erase on-demand components that are not currently in use, click File > Manage Session > Erase Unused Model Reps. When you modify values of components in a graphics representation, the edits do not take effect until the model is regenerated. To avoid losing changes, regenerate the assembly before you remove the retrieved components from memory.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 10 | Page 31
al
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Using On-Demand Simplified Reps

Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_On-Demand DRILL_ON-DEMAND.ASM Task 1: Reference models opened using on-demand.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Start the View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar. On the Simp Rep tab, double-click the Light rep. 3. Click Close.
6. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed. 7. Click OK to erase the listed components from memory.
Fo r
8. In the ribbon, click Assemble from the Component group. Select SPARK_PLUG.PRT and click Open. 9. Select the appropriate surfaces, Coincident as shown in the figure.
PT
5. In the model tree, expand ENGINE.ASM, GEARBOX_CHUCK.ASM, and DRILL_CHUCK.ASM.
In
In the model tree, notice that several models are excluded and two have their status set to Graphics Rep.
The model tree updates again and the cylinder no longer displays as a geometry rep.
Module 10 | Page 32
te rn
.
4. In the model tree, click Settings and select Tree Columns from the drop-down list. In the Model Tree Columns dialog box, select Simplified Reps from the Type drop-down list. Click OK to close the dialog box.
al
U se
O
2012 PTC
nl y
11. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed. 12. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Unused Model Reps. 13. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed and click OK. Task 2: Edit the on-demand settings.
1. Click File > Options. 2. Select Assembly and click the On Demand Settings button from the component retrieval settings group. 3. Click Prompt. 4. Click OK.
7. Select the CHUCK.PRT, the part to which the drill bit is to be assembled. 8. From the On Demand Prompt dialog box, click Geometry and OK. The model tree updates and lists the chuck as a geometry rep. 9. Assemble the bit, as shown in the figure. 10. Click Complete Component
In
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
There is nothing to erase. The Restore Representation and Erase cleanup setting automatically removed the model from memory.
te rn
.
al
U se
from the Component group. Select 6. In the ribbon, click Assemble STD_BIT_25MM.PRT and click Open.
5. Click OK to close the Creo Parametric Options dialog box.
nl y
Module 10 | Page 33
Creating External Simplified Reps

You can use external simplified representations to store representations of assemblies without modifying the original assembly.
External Simplified Reps: Separate *.ASM file. Actions do not affect the reference assembly. Can retrieve in the Open Rep dialog box.
Figure 1 Copy As External
Fo r
Creating External Simplified Reps

External simplified representations are stored as special assembly type files with a standard *.ASM extension. Because it is a separate assembly file, you can even manage it using a data management system such as Pro/INTRALINK or Windchill PDMLink. Think of an external simplified rep as a placeholder for a simplified view of a design assembly. You can create multiple external simplified representations to correspond to different assembly areas and levels of detail. Low-level components without top-level and intermediate-level assemblies can be included, so multiple users can work simultaneously. The use of external simplified representations minimizes the risk of accidental modifications to top-level assemblies. All the components in an external simplified representation are the same as those in the reference assembly. Therefore, it is not necessary to propagate modifications made to the external simplified representation or reference
PT
In
Figure 2 Open External Rep
te rn
al
U se
nl y
assembly. All modifications to external simplified representations are automatically reflected in the reference assembly. External simplified representations are stored in a separate assembly (.ASM) file with an external simplified representation subtype. The creation, redefinition, or removal of an external simplified representation does not change the reference assembly. It is not necessary for the reference assembly to be in session when working with external simplified representations. You can include components from any level of the reference assembly in the external simplified representation. You can exclude the reference assembly and intermediate sub-assemblies even if low-level components are included. When a model contains substituted components, the top-level assembly is always included in the external simplified representation. The location of components included in external simplified representations is fully associated with corresponding components of the reference assembly. You can specify whether components included in external simplified representations can be modified or used for reference purposes only. You can create references within external simplified representations. Creo Parametric treats such references as if they were created in the reference assembly. You can perform component and feature operations on the top level of an external simplified representation model. There are three ways to create an external simplified rep: You can click File > New. In the New dialog box, you can select the reference assembly model during the assembly creation process. From the view manager, select a simplified representation and click Edit > Copy As External. You can also click File > Save As > Save a Copy to save a copy of your assembly by specifying an external simplified representation as the type of file to be saved.
Fo r
Opening an External Simplified Rep
You can open an external simplified rep by selecting its file name in the Open dialog box. Also, you can open an external simplified rep that is related to a model by clicking the External Rep button in the Open Rep dialog box.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Module 10 | Page 35
PROCEDURE - Creating External Simplified Reps

Advanced_Assembly\Simplified-Reps_External DRILL_EXTERNAL.ASM Task 1: Create an external simplified rep using the Copy As External feature.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. from 2. Click View Manager the In Graphics toolbar and double-click the Engine rep. 3. Right-click Engine from the Names list and select Copy As External. 4. Type engine_ext and click OK to open the external rep. 5. Click Save 6. Click Close
7. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed and click OK. 8. Click Open .
11. The Open Rep dialog box appears. Click External Rep. 12. Select ENGINE_EXT.ASM and click Open.
Fo r
13. In the model tree, expand DRILL_EXTERNAL.ASM. Notice only the components from the Engine rep are included. 14. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar.
The model tree only shows components included in the external simplified rep. The view manager of an external rep only lists two simplified rep types, Definition Rep and Default Rep. 15. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar.
16. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed and click OK. Only components of the external rep are brought into session.
Module 10 | Page 36
PT
10. Select Open Representation from the Open drop-down list.
9. The Open dialog box appears. Select, but do not open, DRILL_EXTERNAL.ASM.
In
te rn
from the Quick Access toolbar and click OK.
al
U se
2012 PTC
nl y
Task 2:
Create a new external simplified rep. .
1. Click New
2. In the New dialog box, select Assembly and Ext. Simp.Rep. 3. Edit the name to eng_carb_ext and click OK. 4. Select DRILL_EXTERNAL.ASM and click Open. 5. In the Edit:DEFINITION REP component chooser, do the following: Right-click DRILL_EXTERNAL.ASM and click Set Representation to > Exclude. Expand the DRILL_EXTERNAL.ASM node. Select ENGINE.ASM. Press CTRL, right-click CARBURETOR.ASM, and click Set Representation to > Master. Click OK to complete the external simplified rep.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 10 | Page 37
al
U se
nl y
Fo r
Module 10 | Page 38
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
11
U se O nl y
Creating and Using Assembly Structure and Skeletons

Module Overview
Creating an assembly structure and using skeletons enables you to plan and design stages of assemblies. In this module, you learn how to create an assembly structure in the model tree that you can use to plan the assembly.
Finally, you learn how to create components from shared skeleton references.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: Create an assembly structure. Create skeletons for space claims, interfaces, and placement. Copy models into skeletons. Create multiple skeletons with connections. Share skeleton geometry. Create a motion skeleton and a corresponding sketch. Create bodies and assign connections for a motion skeleton. Create solid models from a motion skeleton.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
You also learn how to use skeletons for space claims, interfaces, component placement, and motion.
al
Module 11 | Page 1
Understanding Skeletons
You can use a skeleton to create the framework of your design.
Purpose: Design Framework Common Reference Propagate Change Skeleton Properties: First Component No Mass Props Blue Color Contents: Datum Features Sketches Surfaces
Figure 1 Skeleton
Understanding Skeletons
Skeletons are commonly used to do the following: Create space claims for components. Create interfaces and placement references between components. Provide motion between components either by modifying skeleton dimensions or through the use of mechanism connections. Skeletons are components that are given special properties. When created, a skeleton automatically becomes the first component of the assembly so that each subsequent component can reference it. Skeletons do not affect the mass properties of the assembly, regardless of the geometry created in them. In addition, skeletons are easily recognized in the assembly due to the blue color they are assigned by default to help distinguish them from other components. Skeletons typically contain a variety of datum features such as datum planes, axes, points, and coordinate systems. Skeletons also commonly contain sketches and surfaces to represent geometry that will be created in components. Although not as common, a skeleton can contain solid geometry; however, you can only share the surfaces of the solids.
Fo r
PT
Skeletons are powerful tools that you can use to create the 3-D layout or framework of an assembly design. Skeletons can serve as a common reference source for geometry and assembling components. Any edits to the skeleton automatically update components assembled to the skeleton and components that utilize shared geometry.
In
te rn
al
U se
Figure 2 Final Design
nl y
Benefits of a Skeleton
An example of the advantages of using a skeleton when assembling components can be seen in the figure with the following scenario: In this non-skeleton design scenario: Component A is assembled first. Component B is then assembled to A. Component C is then assembled by referencing components A and B. Component D is then assembled by referencing components B and C. This scenario can cause the following problems:
No Skeleton
In this skeleton-based design scenario:
PT
Components A, B, C, and D are each assembled to the skeleton and not to each other. Components A, B, C, and D each contain shared geometry reference from the skeleton.
In
te rn
With Skeleton
Fo r
This skeleton-based design scenario has the following advantages: Components A, B, C, and D can each be deleted separately since they are assembled to the skeleton independently. If major changes are necessary for multiple components (for example: overall length change), the skeleton can be modified, propagating edits to each one of the components that share skeleton geometry.
2012 PTC
al
Components A and B cannot be deleted since the other components reference it. If major changes are necessary for multiple components (for example: overall length change), each component has to be modified separately, possibly causing a regeneration failure of the next downstream component.
U se
O
Module 11 | Page 3
nl y
Creating an Assembly Structure

You can begin your design with a populated assembly structure.
Purpose: Up Front Planning Top-Down Design Component Types: Skeletons Unplaced Included Packaged Bulk Items
Component Types
Fo r
New components for assembly structures are typically created from model templates. You can create model templates for standard and sheetmetal parts, as well as assemblies. You should also use these templates when creating skeletons. You can create the following types of components in an assembly structure: Skeletons You can create one or more skeletons per assembly. The first skeleton is assembled by the system using a default constraint. Subsequent skeletons are assembled like typical components. You can assemble them by default or by using constraints or connections. You can have multiple skeletons at the top level or a single top-level skeleton and multiple skeletons at the sub-assembly level. Parts You can create standard or sheetmetal parts. You can assemble them by default if suitable geometry does not exist, or you can assemble them using constraints or connections to the skeleton or other components. Sub-assemblies You can create sub-assemblies, as desired, to organize the assembly. Unplaced Components You can create a new component or sub-assembly and then select the Unplaced option. The Unplaced option
PT
In
In the design process, you can create the structure of an assembly first, without defining any component geometry or specific placement constraints. Creating an assembly structure helps you plan your project by enabling you to delegate tasks to team members. You can also assign non-geometric information up front in the form of parameters such as part number, cost, supplier, and material.
te rn
al
Creating an Assembly Structure
U se
Figure 1 Assembly Structure
nl y
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
leaves the new component listed in the model tree, but it is physically unplaced and not visible in the model. You can redefine the component to locate it with constraints or connections at any time. Unplaced components are shown in gray with a dashed rectangle in the model tree. Included Components You can include existing components or sub-assemblies in your assembly structure. This is useful for standard components or hardware that has been previously modeled. You can redefine the component to locate it with constraints or connections at any time. Packaged Components If you know an approximate location for new or existing parts or assemblies, you can assemble them, drag them to a location, and then complete the component with zero or partial constraints. This is particularly useful for situations when a component will be mated to a plane, but the exact location is not known yet. You can redefine the component to locate it with additional constraints or connections at any time. Packaged components appear with a small hollow rectangle next to the component icon in the model tree. Children of packaged components appear with a double rectangle icon. Bulk Items You can also add bulk items to an assembly structure to represent components that do not require design geometry. Typical bulk items include lubricants, adhesives, paint, and so on. Bulk items are components that appear in the model tree and the Bill of Materials, but do not contain any modeled geometry. However, you can add parameters to bulk items, such as a description, type, or quantity.
U se
nl y
Module 11 | Page 5
PROCEDURE - Creating Assembly Structure

Close Window Erase Not Displayed AC40.ASM
Advanced_Assembly\Structure Task 1:
Create an assembly structure in the empty assembly.
from the 2. Click Create Component group. 3. Select Skeleton Model as the type and Standard as the subtype, if necessary. Edit the name to main_skel and click OK. 4. Click Browse and double-click MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT in the Choose template dialog box.
8. Ensure that the Leave Component Unplaced check box is cleared and click OK.
Fo r
9. Right-click, and select Default Constraint. .
Module 11 | Page 6
PT
7. Select Part as the type. Edit the name to frame and click OK.
6. Click Create
In
Watch the structure you are creating develop in the model tree as you work through this procedure. from the Component group.
te rn
5. Click OK in the Creation Options dialog box.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
11. Click Create
12. Select Subassembly as the type and Standard as the subtype, if necessary. Edit the name to engine and click OK. 13. Click Browse in the Creation Options dialog box. 14. Double-click MM_KG_SEC_ASSY.ASM in the Choose template dialog box. 15. Click OK in the Creation Options dialog box. 16. Right-click and select Default Constraint. 17. Click Complete Component . 18. In the model tree, right-click ENGINE.ASM and select Activate. 19. Click Create from the Component group.
21. Click Browse in the Creation Options dialog box.
23. Click OK in the Creation Options dialog box. 24. Right-click and select Default Constraint. 25. Click Complete Component 26. Click Create from the Component group. .
28. Expand the ENGINE.ASM node.
Fo r
29. Select the Leave Component Unplaced check box and click OK. Unplaced components are identified with a special gray icon.
30. Click Create
PT
27. Edit the name to crank and click OK.
31. Edit the name to piston and click OK. 32. Click OK in the Creation Options dialog box. 33. Click Create .
34. Edit the name to rod and click OK. 35. Click OK in the Creation Options dialog box.
2012 PTC
In
te rn
.
al
22. Double-click MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT in the Choose template dialog box.
U se
20. Select Part as the type. Edit the name to block and click OK.
O
Module 11 | Page 7
nl y
36. In the model tree, right-click AC40.ASM and select Activate. 37. Click the Assemble drop-down menu in the Component group and select Include. 38. Select BOLT.PRT and click Open. 39. Select BOLT_8 from the list and click Open. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
Module 11 | Page 8
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Creating Skeletons for Space Claims

You can use skeletons to define and share common design references.
Purpose: Claim 3-D Space for Components Common Reference Propagate Change
te rn
Fo r
Space claim skeletons are comprised of the following: Surfaces Typically, surfaces and datum planes are used for space claim references in a skeleton. You can create open or enclosed surfaces to define the occupied volume for components or sub-assemblies. The surface can be as simple or as complex as required to convey the design intent. You can also use the external shrinkwrap functionality to create an engulfing surface over an existing part or sub-assembly to represent a component that is to be placed in the assembly. Datum Features A series of offset datum planes can also be useful to claim space for components. Offset planes are easily adjustable in size, and you can use them alone or in conjunction with surfaces in the skeleton. In the figures, a skeleton model contains surfaces used to claim space for the interior engine components, such as the piston, connecting rod, and crankshaft. An offset datum plane is used to help claim space for the overall engine block height.
PT
You can use skeletons to allocate or claim 3-D space before modeling or assembling the components. A skeleton can provide a common reference for geometry to be shared to multiple components. You can then modify the space claim features in a skeleton, propagating change to one or multiple components.
In
Creating Skeletons for Space Claims Theory
al
Figure 2 Completed Design
U se
Surfaces Datum Features
Figure 1 Space Claim
nl y
Contents:
PROCEDURE - Creating Skeletons for Space Claims

Advanced_Assembly\Skeletons_Space-Claims Task 1: Add surface geometry to the skeleton model.
4. Select datum plane TOP and drag the handle to an offset of 54. 5. Select the Properties tab. Edit the datum's name to height and click OK. 6. With the datum plane HEIGHT
8. Click OK
Fo r
9. In the dashboard, click Surface .
10. In the dashboard, edit the depth. Click To Selected and select datum plane TOP. 11. Click Complete Feature 12. Press CTRL+D to reorient. .
Module 11 | Page 10
PT
7. Sketch a 21 diameter circle centered on the sketch references.
In
still selected, click Extrude from the Shapes group.
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
3. In the ribbon, select the Model tab, if necessary. Click Plane in the Datum group.
nl y
2. In the model tree, select MAIN_SKEL.PRT. Right-click and select Open.
13. In the model tree, select datum plane FRONT and click Extrude from the Shape group. from the 14. Click Sketch View Setup group, if necessary. 15. Sketch a 28 diameter circle centered on the sketch references.
19. Click Complete Feature 20. Press CTRL+D to reorient.
22. Right-click Extrude 2 and select Edit to view the features of the new extrude feature. Task 2:
Merge the surface geometry.
Fo r
2. In the model tree, press CTRL and select EXTRUDE 1 and EXTRUDE 2. 3. Select Merge Editing group. from the
4. In the graphics window, click the direction arrows so that the merge preview appears, as shown in the figure. 5. Click Complete Feature . 6. Click in the background of the graphics window to de-select all geometry and features. This completes the procedure.
PT
1. Click in the background of the graphics window to de-select all geometry and features.
In
te rn
to 21. Click Plane Display disable the display of datum planes.
al
U se
18. Edit the depth. Click Both Sides and type 32.
17. In the dashboard, click Surface .
nl y
16. Click OK
Creating Skeletons for Placement References

You can use skeletons to define placement references.
Purpose: Define component interfaces Define placement references Propagate change Contents: Sketches Surfaces Datum features
Figure 2 Component Interfaces
Creating Skeletons for Placement References
Fo r
Skeleton features created to represent interfaces can provide the shape and/or location of the interfaces between components. You can copy the interfaces to multiple components to provide a common reference for creating solid geometry. You can modify the interface features in the skeleton, propagating changes to one or multiple components. You can also use skeletons to define component placement. Therefore, you can modify the placement of single or multiple components with edits to the skeleton. Component placement examples include the following: An axis in the skeleton to provide a partial reference for assembling a component. A coordinate system to provide a complete reference for assembling a component. A series of sketched lines representing an adjustable mechanical linkage. Once the components are assembled to the skeleton, you can edit lengths and/or angles of the skeleton sketches to update the model locations and/or size.
PT
You can use skeletons to define the interfaces between adjacent or mating components, and also to provide common references for assembling components.
In
te rn
al
Figure 3 Models Assembled to a Skeleton
U se
Figure 1 Placement References
nl y
Typically, sketches, surfaces, and various datum features are used for interface and placement references in a skeleton. These features can be as simple or as complex as required to convey the design intent. In Figure 2, a skeleton model contains a sketched line, surfaces, and axes to represent the length and hole interfaces of the component. You can use these references to create, not only the connecting rod shown in the figure, but also other components that assemble to it. In Figure 3, datum planes and axes are created to define common axis interfaces. These axes can be referenced by the engine block, piston, and crankshaft to create geometry. In addition, the bolts can also use the axes to define their placement.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 11 | Page 13
al
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Skeletons for Placement References

Advanced_Assembly\Skeletons_Placement Task 1:
Create axes for use as assembly placement references.
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: . 2. In the model tree, right-click MAIN_SKEL.PRT and select Open. 3. Click Axis group. from the Datum
4. Select a surface of EXTRUDE 1, as shown. 5. In the Datum Axis dialog box, select the Properties tab. Edit the name to cyl and click OK.
8. Select a surface of EXTRUDE 2, as shown.
Fo r
9. In the Datum Axis dialog box, select the Properties tab. Edit the name to crank and click OK.
Module 11 | Page 14
PT
7. Click Axis group.
from the Datum
In
6. Click in the background of the graphics window to de-select the axis CYL.
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Task 2:
Create datum planes for use as assembly placement references. . from the Datum
1. Enable Plane Display
2. Select datum plane RIGHT and select Plane group. 3. Drag the handle to an offset of 20, as shown in the figure.
6. On the Properties tab, edit the name to offset and click OK. Task 3:
already selected, click Axis from the Datum group.
3. Select datum plane FRONT and drag the handle to a forward offset of 10, as shown in the figure.
Fo r
4. Click OK to close the Datum Plane dialog box.
2012 PTC
PT
2. Move the Datum Axis dialog box as necessary and click Plane .
In
te rn
Module 11 | Page 15
1. With datum plane OFFSET
al
Create an axis and reference the datum plane OFFSET.
U se
5. Select the upper cylindrical surface of EXTRUDE 2 as the reference.
nl y
4. On the Display tab, enable the Adjust Outline check box and select Reference from the drop-down list.
5. On the Display tab, enable the Adjust Outline check box and select Reference from the drop-down list. 6. Select the upper cylindrical surface of EXTRUDE 2 as the reference. 7. On the Properties tab, edit the name to HOLE1 and click OK.
Fo r
Module 11 | Page 16
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
8. Click in the background of the graphics window to de-select all geometry and features.
nl y
Copying a Model to a Skeleton

You can create a skeleton by copying another model.
Convert Standard Part to Skeleton: Create Standard Part Create Assembly Create Skeleton Component Copy From Existing Browse to Standard Part Becomes a Skeleton Placed in Assembly Skeleton Color
Copying a Model to a Skeleton
Fo r
You can convert a standard part model to create a skeleton. Example scenarios of when you can use this technique include the following:
A standard part model is used as a makeshift skeleton for an assembly and you wish to convert it to an actual skeleton. A skeleton is created for another design and can be reused for the current design. You are working with other team members who have modeled skeletons for their portions of the assembly and you wish to create a top-level assembly with multiple skeletons. Rapidly creating and assembling multiple skeletons in the current assembly. To copy an existing model to a skeleton, you create a component in the context of the assembly and select Skeleton as the component type. Then, you select Copy From Existing and browse to the existing model. The model is copied into the current assembly and assumes skeleton properties, such as the default blue skeleton color.
PT
Figure 2 Standard Part
In
te rn
Figure 3 Copied to Skeleton
al
U se
Figure 1 Copy from Existing
nl y
Creating Multiple Skeletons

You can add multiple skeletons to your assembly.
Create Multiple Skeletons: multiple_skeletons_allowed Assemble Skeletons: By Default Constraints Connections Techniques: Independent skeletons Hierarchy of skeletons Represent one or many components
Creating Multiple Skeletons
There are several different techniques that you can use when working with multiple skeletons, including the following:
Fo r
Create the multiple skeletons independent of each other so that you can modify each skeleton without affecting the other skeletons. Use multiple skeletons in a hierarchy. With this technique, you create a main skeleton and then share references to several other skeletons. The additional skeletons can be at the top level also or in a sub-assembly. Modifying the main skeleton then propagates change to multiple other skeletons, causing several components to update at once. When creating multiple skeletons, consider whether each skeleton represents one or many components. A skeleton can also represent an entire sub-assembly. The figure shown illustrates multiple independent skeletons in use. You use the MAIN skeleton to share references to the FRAME and also the BLOCK in ENGINE.ASM. The CRANK, PISTON, and ROD skeletons are additional skeletons assembled to the MAIN skeleton using connections to provide mechanism movement.
PT
You can assemble the first skeleton using the system default constraint. You can assemble subsequent skeletons like typical components. You can assemble them by default or by using constraints or connections. You can create multiple skeletons at the top level and at the sub-assembly levels.
In
In the design process, you can create the structure of an assembly first, without defining any component geometry or specific placement constraints to locate components. Creating an assembly structure helps you plan your project by enabling delegation of tasks to team members. You can also assign non-geometric information up front in the form of parameters such as part number, cost, supplier, and material.
te rn
al
U se
Figure 1 3-D Skeleton Models
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Multiple Skeletons

Advanced_Assembly\Skeletons_Multiple Task 1: Create and assemble the crank skeleton.
2. Click File > Options. The Creo Parametric Options window appears. 3. Select Configuration Editor from the menu on the left . 4. Click Add....
6. Edit the Option value drop-down menu to Yes, if necessary, and click OK.
7. Click OK and click No to confirm that the configuration edits made are applied to the current session only.
9. Right-click and select Hide.
Fo r
10. In the ribbon, select the Model tab, if necessary. 11. Select MAIN_SKEL.PRT in the model tree. 12. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style > Transparent. 13. Click Create from the Component group.
14. Select Skeleton Model as the type. Edit the name to crank_skel and click OK. 15. Click Browse. Select CRANK_GEOM.PRT in the Choose template dialog box, and click Open. 16. Ensure that the Leave Component Unplaced check box is cleared. 17. Click OK in the Creation Options dialog box.
2012 PTC
PT
8. In the model tree, press CTRL and select FRAME.PRT and ENGINE.ASM.
In
If the Yes option is selected, the settings are saved to a configuration file and loaded during the next session.
te rn
al
The multiple_skeletons_allowed configuration file option determines whether multiple skeletons can be created as replacement parts.
U se
5. In the Option name field of the Options window, type multiple_skeletons_allowed.
O
Module 11 | Page 19
nl y
18. In the dashboard, select Pin
from the User Defined drop-down list.
19. Select the CRANK axes in both models to define axis alignment. 20. Select the FRONT datum plane in both models to define translation.
21. Click Complete Component Task 2:
Create and assemble the piston skeleton.
1. Click Create
2. Edit the name to piston_skel and click OK.
Fo r
6. Select the CYL axes in both models to define axis alignment. 7. Select the FRONT datum plane in both models to define rotation. 8. Press CTRL+ALT and right-click to drag the skeleton into the approximate position shown in the figure. 9. Click Complete Component .
Module 11 | Page 20
PT
5. In the dashboard, select Slider list.
In
3. Click Browse. Select PISTON_GEOM.PRT in the Choose template dialog box and click Open. from the User Defined drop-down
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Task 3:
Create and assemble the connecting rod skeleton.
1. Click Create
2. Edit the name to rod_skel and click OK. 3. Click Browse. Select ROD_GEOM.PRT in the Choose template dialog box and click Open. 4. Click OK in the Creation Options dialog box.
6. Select the PIN_1 axes in both models to define axis alignment. 7. Select the FRONT datum plane in the ROD_SKEL.PRT and CRANK_SKEL.PRT models to define translation. 8. Right-click and select Add Set.
Fo r
11. Select the PIN_2 axes in both ROD_SKEL.PRT and PISTON_SKEL.PRT to define axis alignment. .
12. Click Complete Component 13. Click Axis Display
PT
10. Click Plane Display disable their display.
In
9. In the dashboard, edit the connection to Cylinder .
from the Component group. Select the 14. Click Drag Components cylindrical shaft surface of the CRANK_SKEL and drag it through its motion. This completes the procedure.
2012 PTC
te rn
to to disable their display.
Module 11 | Page 21
al
U se
nl y
5. In the dashboard, select Pin from the User Defined drop-down list.
Sharing Skeleton Geometry

You can copy references from a skeleton into other models.
Publish Geometry Feature: Identify and Collect Copy Geometry Feature: Publish Geometry Surface Sets Chains References
Figure 2 Geometry Copied from Skeleton
Fo r
There are two main data sharing features, Publish Geometry and Copy Geometry. To create these features, you activate the component, then create the data sharing feature in the context of the assembly.
Publish Geometry Feature

The Publish Geometry feature enables you to identify and collect a selection of references from your skeleton and apply the references to a feature. With the Publish Geometry feature, you can select surface sets, chains (edges or sketches), and references (datum features). For example, in a skeleton model you typically have a series of references destined for component A and other references destined for component B. Some of these references can be common, while others may not be. You can create one Publish Geometry feature called FOR_PART_A and another called FOR_PART_B. Each Publish Geometry feature contains the selection of references for the respective target component. Be aware that the Publish Geometry feature does not share any geometry outside of the skeleton. It simply enables you to organize the selections before copying.
PT
Once skeletons have been created, you can share geometry with the solid components. You can use the shared geometry as references to build solid features. It is through the use of shared geometry that the skeleton can propagate edits to the component features. Note that this step is not required for components that are only being assembled to the skeleton.
In
Sharing Skeleton Geometry
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Figure 1 Copy Geometry
This is particularly useful when working on a team where others may need to reference a skeleton you have created. The Publish Geometry feature is entirely optional. Its use depends on the requirements and complexity of the design.
Copy Geom Feature

The Copy Geometry feature enables you to share references outside of a skeleton by copying them into a target component. This target component can be another skeleton or a solid part. Once copied, you can reference the copied geometry to create features in the target component. The features in the target component that reference the copied geometry update when you make changes to the skeleton. You can select the following to copy: Publish Geometry Feature (containing a selection of its own) Surface Sets (individual, selection sets, or quilts) Chains (sketches, datum curves, edges) References (datum planes, axes, points or coordinate systems)
Keep in mind the following Copy Geometry feature behaviors: You have control over the dependency of a Copy Geometry feature. You can make the resulting copied geometry dependent or independent of the skeleton model. You can select from only one model when creating a Copy Geometry feature. If you need to copy references from multiple skeletons, you can create multiple Copy Geometry features. Copy Geometry features do not enable you to copy solid features. This is why solids are not typically used to create a skeleton. However, you are able to copy the outer surfaces of a solid feature. You can create the Copy Geometry feature with the Assembly Context option or the External option. The Assembly Context option relies on how the target component is assembled when creating the copied geometry, thus creating a dependency between the target part and its parent assembly. The External option avoids this dependency by enabling you to select the model to copy from, and to locate the copied geometry in the target component by a default constraint or by selecting coordinate systems.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
The figure shown illustrates a selection of surfaces and datum features being copied from the skeleton using a Copy Geometry feature. The resulting Copy Geometry feature is also shown along with the model tree.
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Module 11 | Page 23
PROCEDURE - Sharing Skeleton Geometry

Close Window Erase Not Displayed BLOCK.PRT
Advanced_Assembly\Skeletons_Sharing Task 1:
Copy references from MAIN_SKEL.PRT to the BLOCK.PRT. .
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. Click Copy Geometry in the Get Data group.
3. In the dashboard, de-select Published Geometry Only click Open . 4. Select MAIN_SKEL.PRT and click Open. 5. In the Placement dialog box, click Coord Sys and select PRT_CSYS_DEF from the model tree of each model. 6. Click OK to close the dialog box. 7. In the dashboard, select the References tab and activate the Surface Sets field.
Fo r
10. Activate the Chain field and select the curve feature shown in the figure. 11. Activate the References field. Press CTRL and select datum plane OFFSET and the axes HOLE1 and HOLE2 from the Model Tree(2). .
12. Click Complete Feature 13. Click Close
Module 11 | Page 24
PT
9. Resize the accessory window as required.
In
8. In the docked accessory window, query-select the entire surface quilt of MAIN_SKEL.PRT.
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
and then
Task 2:
Copy references from CRANK_SKEL.PRT to the CRANK.PRT. . Select CRANK.PRT and click Open. from the Get Data group. and then
1. Click Open
2. Click Copy Geometry
3. In the dashboard, de-select Published Geometry Only click Open . 4. Select CRANK_SKEL.PRT and click Open.
8. Query-select the entire surface quilt of CRANK_SKEL.PRT.
PT
10. Activate the References field. Press CTRL and select axes CRANK and PIN_1 from the Model Tree(2).
In
9. Activate the Chain field and select the outer curve feature shown in the figure.
Fo r
12. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar. Geometry copied from a skeleton into the design model is associative. If the skeleton changes, the referencing design model updates accordingly, as well as all geometry referencing the copied geometry.
2012 PTC
te rn
.
Module 11 | Page 25
al
U se
7. In the dashboard, select the References tab and activate the Surface Sets field.
6. Click OK to close the dialog box.
nl y
5. In the Placement dialog box, click Coord Sys and select PRT_CSYS_DEF from the model tree of each model.
Creating and Placing Models using Skeleton References

You can create solid models and place components by referencing a skeleton.
Create Solid Geometry Utilize Copy Geometry Surfaces/Planes/Axes Redefine Unplaced Components New Solid Geometry Copy Geometry Changes Propagate
Creating and Placing Models using Skeleton References

Once you have used a Copy Geometry feature to share references, you can begin to create solid geometry utilizing the copied references. You can either open the component in its own window or activate the component and model in the context of the assembly. You can use the copied surfaces, planes, axes, and so on by referencing them when creating sketches, solid features, and other datum features in the model. Once enough references exist, you can redefine unplaced components. You can select either the new solid geometry or copied geometry to define placement using constraints or connections. Once you have referenced the copied geometry in the creation of model features, edits to the skeleton propagate to the model. In the figure shown, the space claim surfaces from the skeleton are being used to create solid tube shapes for the beginning of the engine block model. Holes are also created using the copied axes. Finally, the unplaced bolts from the original assembly structure are now placed, referencing both solid geometry and the copied axes.
Fo r
Module 11 | Page 26
PT
In
te rn
al
Figure 3 Referencing Model
2012 PTC
U se
Figure 1 Skeleton
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating and Placing Models Using Skeleton References

Close Window Erase Not Displayed Advanced_Assembly\Skeletons_Placing-Models NONE Task 1: Reference copied features to create features in the block part.
2. Select Configuration Editor from the menu on the left.
3. Click Add.... In the Option name field of the Options window, type multiple_skeletons_allowed. Edit the Option value drop-down menu to Yes, and click OK. The multiple_skeletons_allowed configuration file option determines whether multiple skeletons can be created. 4. Click OK and click No to confirm that the configuration edits made are applied to the current session only.
5. Click Open
and double-click AC40.ASM.
In
te rn
.
If the Yes option is selected, the settings are saved to a configuration file and loaded during the next session.
al
U se
Fo r
9. Click Yes in the Confirm dialog box.
10. Select the Model tab. Select the Extern Copy Geom feature in the model tree. from the 11. Click Thicken Editing group. Edit the thickness to 2 and press ENTER.
2012 PTC
PT
8. In the ribbon, select the View tab. Click the Appearance Gallery drop-down menu. Select the Clear Appearance drop-down list and select Clear All Appearances.
7. In the model tree, expand ENGINE.ASM. Right-click BLOCK.PRT and select Open.
O
.
nl y
1. Click File > Options. The Creo Parametric Options window appears.
Module 11 | Page 27
13. Select datum plane TOP and click Extrude group. 14. From the Sketching group, click Project dialog box. 15. Select the datum curve at the right side of the model. 16. Click OK . 17. Edit the depth to 4 and press ENTER. 18. Click Complete Feature 19. Click Plane Display disable their display. . to
from the Shapes
. Click Loop in the Type
22. Edit the diameter to 3 and select to edit the Through All depth.
Fo r
PT
21. Press CTRL and select the hole's placement surface, as shown in the figure.
Module 11 | Page 28
In
20. Click Hole from the Engineering group and select axis HOLE1.
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
24. With the hole still selected, press CTRL+C and then CTRL+V. 25. Select axis HOLE2. Press CTRL and select the hole's placement surface, as shown in the figure. 26. Click Complete Feature . 27. In the model tree, right-click the Extern Copy Geom feature and select Hide.
Task 2:
Reference copied geometry to create features in the crank part.
1. Right-click CRANK.PRT and select Open.
2. In the ribbon, select the View tab. Click the Appearance Gallery
3. Click Yes in the Confirm dialog box. 4. Select the Model tab. 5. Select the Extern Copy Geom feature in the model tree, then click from the Editing group. Solidify 6. Click Complete Feature
In
8. Select the far end of the cylinder.
Fo r
9. From the Sketching group, click Project dialog box.
PT
7. Click Extrude
te rn
. .
from the Shapes group. . Click Loop in the Type
10. Select the datum curve and click OK . 11. Flip the feature direction towards you and drag the depth to 6. 12. Click Complete Feature
The direction arrow should be pointed towards you.
2012 PTC
al
drop-down menu. Select the Clear Appearance drop-down list and select Clear All Appearances.
U se
nl y
Module 11 | Page 29
from the Quick 28. Click Close Access toolbar.
13. Click Extrude
from the Shapes group.
14. Right-click and select Define Internal Sketch. 15. Click Use Previous. 16. Click References from the Setup group. Select axis PIN_1 as a reference and click Close. 17. Sketch a circle with a diameter of 5 centered on PIN_1. Click OK 18. Edit the depth to 6 and press ENTER. 19. Click Complete Feature . 20. In the model tree, right-click the Extern Copy Geom feature and select Hide. from the Quick 21. Click Close Access toolbar. .
23. Click Complete Component Task 3:
Clean up the display and assemble bolts.
2. Select BLOCK.PRT.
Fo r
3. From the Model Display drop-down list, click Component Display Style > Transparent. 4. In the model tree, right-click BOLT_8.PRT and select Edit Definition. 5. Click Show In Assembly Window from the dashboard. 6. Constrain the bolt as shown in the figure and then click Complete Component .
Module 11 | Page 30
PT
1. Press CTRL and select MAIN_SKEL.PRT and CRANK_SKEL.PRT in the model tree. Right-click and select Hide.
In
te rn
.
22. Right-click CRANK.PRT in the model tree and select Edit Definition to display it in the graphics window.
al
U se
2012 PTC
nl y
7. Click Axis Display their display.
to disable
8. Select BOLT_8.PRT and press CTRL+C and CTRL+V. 9. Constrain the bolt into the last hole as shown in the figure and then click Complete Component .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 11 | Page 31
al
U se
nl y
Creating a Motion Skeleton

You can use a motion skeleton to create a mechanism framework of your design.
Define Mechanisms Quickly: Motion/Body Skeletons Steps: Motion Skeleton (.ASM) Sketch Body Skeletons (.PRT) Body Connections Solid Models Solid Geometry
Figure 1 Skeleton Body
te rn
Creating a Motion Skeleton
Motion Skeleton A special assembly skeleton type in which body skeletons are created. Body Skeleton A special part skeleton type. Multiple body skeletons are created within a motion skeleton. One body skeleton is created for each mechanism body, including the ground body. Once created, the motion skeleton is actually an assembly of body skeletons. Each body skeleton is automatically assembled with mechanism connections. You can use the motion skeleton to control multiple components by sharing geometry, similar to the way in which you use a standard skeleton. However, in the case of the motion skeleton, the geometry is automatically shared with the end components. The following are the overall steps used to create a motion skeleton: Create the motion skeleton (assembly skeleton). Create a sketch to represent the mechanism movement and bodies. Create the body skeleton (part skeleton). Define the body to body connections for each body skeleton.
2012 PTC
Fo r
Module 11 | Page 32
PT
A motion skeleton is a completely different skeleton type that enables you to define mechanisms quickly. A motion skeleton consists of the following skeleton types:
In
al
Figure 2 Component Referencing Body
U se
nl y
Create the solid models, attaching them to a respective body skeleton. Create the solid geometry in the solid models.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 11 | Page 33
al
U se
nl y
Sketching a Motion Skeleton

You can create a sketch to define the motion of your skeleton.
Created in Motion Skeleton Sketch to Represent: Ground Body Mechanism Bodies Joint Connections
Figure 1 Motion Skeleton Sketch
After creating the motion skeleton assembly, you create a sketch. The sketch must represent the following: The Ground Body This is a non-moving component. Any Mechanism Bodies Any moving part in the mechanism. Joint Connections, which are as follows: Pin joints can be defined at entity intersections or at circle centers. Slider joints can be defined from overlapping lines. Bearing joints can be defined where a line meets a non-endpoint location of another line. A Slot connection can be defined where a line endpoint lies on an arc or circle. Ball and Cylinder joints can be selected at locations where a Pin joint is found. When you sketch a motion skeleton, you use different techniques than a typical feature sketch. Sketching a motion skeleton is similar to sketching a series of curves for a typical skeleton. For example, for a motion skeleton, you can define the mechanism in a single sketch. The sketch itself does not have to move like the mechanism would if you were to drag the sketched entities. The motion is computed after the selection of bodies and connections. Also, in a sketch for a motion skeleton, it is typical to overlap entities or create duplicate coincident entities for use in multiple bodies. In Figure 1, a sketch is defined to represent a simple motor: a ground, a crankshaft, a connecting rod, and a piston are all represented.
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
Sketching a Motion Skeleton
al
U se
All-In-One Sketch Overlapping Entities
nl y
Sketching Techniques:
PROCEDURE - Sketching a Motion Skeleton

Close Window Erase Not Displayed MOTOR.ASM
Advanced_Assembly\Skeleton-Motion_Sketch Task 1: Create the motion skeleton. .
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. Click Create .
3. Select Skeleton Model as the type and Motion as the subtype. 5. Click Browse. 7. Click OK in the Creation Options dialog box. The motion skeleton is an assembly. Task 2:
Fo r
4. Click Plane Display disable the display.
PT
3. In the Datum group, click Sketch .
2. In the graphics window, select the ASM_FRONT datum plane.
In
1. In the model tree, right-click MOTION_SKEL.ASM and select Activate.
from 5. Click Sketch View the In Graphics toolbar. Sketch a vertical line, as shown in the figure. Edit its length to 100.
2012 PTC
te rn
to
Sketch the line representing the ground of the motion skeleton.
al
U se
Module 11 | Page 35
6. Select MM_KG_SEC_ASSY.ASM and click Open.
4. Edit the Name to motion_skel and click OK.
nl y
6. Sketch the following additional entities to represent the crank: A circle. Edit its diameter to 30. A line at a 45 angle. Dimension it as shown in the figure. A circle. Edit its diameter to 5.
Do not snap the circle to the midpoint of the vertical line. A short vertical line with a midpoint at the center of the previously sketched circle. A rectangle that is centered on the vertical ground line. Locate the top and bottom edges of the rectangle on the previously sketched short vertical line. Edit the dimensions to 35 and 20, as shown in the figure.
Fo r
Module 11 | Page 36
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
7. Sketch the following additional entities to represent the piston: A circle approximately midway along the vertical line representing the ground. Make the diameter equal to the smaller, previously sketched circle.
nl y
2012 PTC
9. Click OK
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 11 | Page 37
al
U se
8. Sketch the following additional entities to represent the rod: A line between the circle at the center of the piston and the end of the crank. Dimension the length of the line and edit its length to 50, as shown in the figure. Sketch one additional circle at each end of the line. Both new circles should be on top of the circles already placed at those locations and they should have the same diameter.
nl y
Creating Bodies for a Motion Skeleton

You can create body skeletons from the motion skeleton sketch.
Create Body Skeletons: Select Curve Chains System Creates Bodies
Figure 2 Body Definition
Creating Bodies for a Motion Skeleton

Once the sketch for the motion skeleton is defined, you can create the body skeletons. A body skeleton is a special type of part skeleton, which the system creates after you select references from the motion skeleton sketch. The system also automatically copies any selected chains from the sketch into the body skeleton. In Figure 1, the model tree shows the motion skeleton assembly containing four body skeleton part models. The selections used to create the ROD_SKEL.PRT are also shown in the figure.
Fo r
Module 11 | Page 38
PT
In
te rn
al
Figure 3 Selecting Body Curves
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Figure 1 Motion Skeleton
PROCEDURE - Creating Bodies for a Motion Skeleton

Advanced_Assembly\Skeleton-Motion_Bodies Task 1: Create the ground body skeleton.
5. Edit the Name to ground_skel and click OK. 6. Select Empty and click OK in the Creation Options dialog box. 7. Query-select the single green line shown in the figure.
8. Click Accept in the BODY DEFINITION dialog box.
Task 2:
Fo r
1. Click Create from the Component group. 2. Select Body as the subtype.
3. Edit the Name to crank_skel and click OK. 4. Click OK in the Creation Options dialog box. 5. Select the large circle shown. 6. Press CTRL and query-select both the small green circle and angled line, as shown in the figure. 7. Click Accept .
2012 PTC
PT
Create the crank body skeleton.
9. In the model tree, expand MOTION_SKEL.ASM. Notice GROUND_SKEL.PRT is created.
In
te rn
Module 11 | Page 39
al
U se
4. Select Body as the subtype.
3. Click Create from the Component group.
nl y
2. In the model tree, right-click MOTION_SKEL.ASM and select Activate.
Task 3:
Create the rod body skeleton.
1. Click Create from the Component group. 2. Select Body as the subtype. 3. Edit the Name to rod_skel and click OK. 4. Click OK in the Creation Options dialog box. 5. Query-select the angled green line shown. 6. Press CTRL and select the small green circles at the ends of the selected line. 7. Click Accept Task 4: .
Create the piston body skeleton.
2. Select Body as the subtype.
Fo r
6. Press CTRL and query-select both the small green circle and green vertical line at the center of the selected rectangle. 7. Click Accept .
When you select curves from the sketch (those added to the Chains field of the BODY_DEFINITION dialog box), you are selecting curves to be copied into the individual body skeleton that you are creating. This completes the procedure.
Module 11 | Page 40
PT
5. Query-select the green rectangular section, as shown.
In
3. Edit the Name to piston_skel and click OK.
te rn
1. Click Create from the Component group.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Assigning Connections for a Motion Skeleton

You can assign mechanism connections to each body skeleton.
Update Connection List: Remove Unwanted Select Type Copy Geometry Created:
Drag Mechanism Assy
Assigning Connections for a Motion Skeleton

Once the body skeletons are created, you can assign the connections for each body skeleton. You can update the connection list within the dialog box used to create each body skeleton. You can remove the unwanted connections after highlighting each on the model. For some connection types, a drop-down list is available to select the desired connection type. For example, you can enable a 2-D sketch to have 3-D motion by changing all the pin connections to ball joints.
Fo r
Once the body definition is completed with a defined connections list, the system creates a Copy Geometry feature to support the connection types in the body skeleton part containing the selected curve chains and the automatically created datum features. Datum features are automatically created in a group following the motion skeleton sketch. The type of datum feature created depends on the type of connection. For example, pin joints require axes while ball joints require points. The system includes these datum features in the Copy Geometry feature along with the curve chains.
Component Placement Dialog Box

You can also use the Invoke Component Placement Dialog option to access the dashboard for each body skeleton definition. This enables you to manually control the types of connections being created.
2012 PTC
PT
Copy Geometry Creation
In
te rn
al
U se
Figure 1 Skeleton
O
Module 11 | Page 41
nl y
Selected Curves Axes/Points
The Motion
After all the body skeletons have been defined, you can drag the mechanism or start Mechanism mode to assign motors and perform mechanism analyses. In the figure shown, the dialog box shows a body definition with the selected chains and the initial list of possible connections.
Fo r
Module 11 | Page 42
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PROCEDURE - Assigning Connections for a Motion Skeleton

Advanced_Assembly\Skeleton-Motion_Connections
Task 1:
Assign connections for the crank skeleton.
> Tree Filters....
3. Under Display, select the Features check box. Click OK. 4. Select FRONT from the Named Views toolbar.
5. In the model tree, expand MOTION_SKEL.ASM.
6. Right-click CRANK_SKEL.PRT and select Edit Definition.
Fo r
8. Right-click the Pin connection that references F5(SKETCH_1) and select Remove. 9. Keep the remaining Pin connection that references End:Curve:F5.
10. Click Accept in the BODY DEFINITION dialog box. Task 2: Assign connections for the rod skeleton.
1. In the model tree, expand MOTION_SKEL.ASM. 2. Right-click ROD_SKEL.PRT and select Edit Definition. 3. In the BODY DEFINITION dialog box, select Update to view a list of the possible connections available for the body.
2012 PTC
PT
7. In the BODY DEFINITION dialog box, select Update to view a list of the possible connections available for the body.
In
te rn
GROUND_SKEL.PRT is not identified in the model tree with a packaged symbol next to it. This means it is fully constrained and does not need to have connections assigned to it.
al
U se
from the In Graphics
O
Module 11 | Page 43
nl y
4. Press CTRL and select the Slot and Bearing connections. Right-click and select Remove. 5. Remove all of the remaining connections except the Pin connection at the center of the circle and at the end of the angled line. This connection references F5(SKETCH_1). 6. Click Accept Task 3: .
Assign connections for the piston skeleton.
2. In the BODY DEFINITION dialog box, select Update. 3. Ensure the slider connection is maintained, shown by a line through the piston body.
4. Keep the Pin connection that is at the center of the circle (shown in the model as a highlight at the center of the circle, and at the end of the connecting line).
Fo r
6. Select Cylinder from the Connections drop-down list. . to enable their display.
7. Click Accept
8. Click Axis Display
9. Examine the model tree and expand the group MOTION_AXES. An axis was created at every assigned connection. Task 4: Edit the motion skeleton.
1. In the model tree, right-click Sketch 1 and select Edit. 2. Edit the 45 angle to 90 and click Regenerate Model Operations group.
Module 11 | Page 44
PT
5. Remove all remaining connections (except the two you have been instructed to keep).
In
te rn
al
in the
2012 PTC
U se
1. In the model tree, right-click PISTON_SKEL.PRT and select Edit Definition.
nl y
3. Click Drag Components from the Component group. 4. In the Drag dialog box, select the Snapshots tab and click Take Snapshot . 5. Select and drag the skeleton by selecting the small circle, as shown in the figure.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 11 | Page 45
al
U se
nl y
6. Double-click Snapshot1 in the Snapshots list and then click Close.
Creating Solid Models from a Motion Skeleton

You can create solid models, referencing bodies of the motion skeleton.
Create Component: Attach to Body Option Merge Feature Created Open Component: Create Features Utilize References View/Drag in Assy
Figure 2 Solid Model in Assembly
te rn
Fo r
First, you create a standard solid part in the context of the assembly. However, you do not place the component manually. Instead, you select the Attach to Body option and select a particular body skeleton. This action does two things; it assembles the component to the body skeleton part and simultaneously copies all of the references from the skeleton part to the component using a merge feature. You can then activate or open the component and begin to create solid geometry with the copied references. You can utilize the copied surfaces, planes, axes, and so on by referencing them when creating sketches, solid features, and other datum features in the model. Once you have referenced the copied geometry in the creation of model features, edits to the motion skeleton sketch can propagate through to the model. As shown in the figures, the copied curves from the motion skeleton sketch, as well as the copied axes from the connections, are being used to create a solid model for the connecting rod of the motor. Holes are also created using the copied axes. Now that solid features are created, you can return to the assembly and drag the mechanism with the solid models attached.
Module 11 | Page 46
PT
Once all the body skeletons have been created and the mechanism motion tested, you can create solid part models from the motion skeleton assembly.
In
Creating Solid Models from a Motion Skeleton
al
Figure 3 Solid Model
2012 PTC
U se
Figure 1 Merged Feature
nl y
PROCEDURE - Creating Solid Models from a Motion Skeleton

Close Window Erase Not Displayed MOTOR. ASM
Advanced_Assembly\Skeleton-Motion_Solid-Models
Task 1:
Create a component by referencing the motion skeleton.
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. Click Create .
3. Select Part as the type and Solid as the subtype. 4. Edit the Name to rod and click OK.
5. Click Browse.... Select MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT and click Open. 6. Select the Attach Component to Body check box. 7. In the model tree, expand MOTION_SKEL.ASM and select ROD_SKEL.PRT.
9. In the model tree, right-click ROD.PRT and select Open.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
The External Merge feature in the model tree copies reference geometry from the motion skeleton into this part.
In
te rn
al
U se
O
Module 11 | Page 47
nl y
.
10. Click Extrude
from the Shapes group.
11. Right-click and select Define Internal Sketch. 12. Select FRONT from the model tree to define the Sketch Plane. Select Top from the Orientation drop-down list and click Sketch in the Sketch dialog box. 13. Click Sketch View from the Setup group. . Select both axes and the
15. Using the referenced axes, create a slot-shaped sketch, as shown in the figure.
16. Click OK
17. Press CTRL+D.
PT
19. Edit the depth to 8 and press ENTER. .
Fo r
Module 11 | Page 48
In
18. Edit the depth direction to Both Sides .
te rn
al
The sketch image shown in the figure contains two arcs, two horizontal lines, and two circles at the center of each arc.
U se
2012 PTC
nl y
14. In the Setup group, click References small circular curves and click Close.
Task 2:
Drag the solid model using the motion skeleton.
1. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar. 2. Select Default Orientation from the Named Views drop-down list from the In Graphics toolbar.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 11 | Page 49
al
U se
5. Select ROD.PRT and drag the model using the motion skeleton.
4. Click Drag Components from the Component group.
nl y
3. Click Axis Display their display.
to disable
Fo r
Module 11 | Page 50
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module Project
12
U se O te rn al
Module 12 | Page 1
Module Overview
Using Creo Parametric and the skills learned in this course, complete the following project design tasks.
Objectives
Fo r
After completing this module, you will be able to: Complete DRIVETRAIN_SKEL.PRT. Create the AUX_SHAFT_ARM_SKEL.PRT. Assemble the AUX_SHAFT_ARM_SKEL.PRT. Assemble the LINK_SKEL.PRT. Create the AUX_ARM.PRT. Create the AUX_SHAFT.PRT. Share geometry from a skeleton. Edit a skeleton controlled design. Create simplified reps. Create display styles. Assemble using mechanism constraints. Add flexibility to STUD.PRT.
2012 PTC
PT
In
nl y
The Table Fan

In this project, you will complete the design of a table fan.
Figure 1 Completed Table Fan
Project Scenario
Fo r
Because all tasks in this project are based on topics that you have learned up to this point in the course, instructions for each project step will be minimal. There will be no step-by-step picks and clicks given. This provides you with a chance to test your knowledge of the materials as you proceed though the project.
Completed Models for Reference

Be sure to save all project models within the working subfolder of the project classroom folder structure. The project folder also contains a sub-folder named completed. Here you will find a completed version of each model in the project. These completed models can be used as reference if required.
Module 12 | Page 2
PT
Minimal Instructions
You will use the skills learned in previous topics of this course to create the final assembly and components of the air circulator.
In
Product Design Consulting, Inc. (PDC) is in charge of designing a table fan for one of their customers. Upon returning from Creo Parametric Advanced Assembly Design training, you are assigned to complete the table fan because the engineer originally responsible for the design is on vacation.
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Skeleton Models
This slide illustrates the skeleton models used in the design.
Figure 1 BASE_SKEL
Figure 2 DRIVETRAIN_SKEL
Figure 3 LINK_SKEL
The Base, Drivetrain, and Link Skeletons
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
You will create the AUX_SHAFT_ARM_SKEL.PRT. You will use it to share geometry to other models and as an assembly reference when positioning components.
The AUX_SHAFT_ARM_SKEL.PRT Model
In
The base, drivetrain, and link skeletons have already been created. You use them to share geometry to related components and as a placement reference when positioning components.
te rn
al
Figure 4 AUX_SHAFT_ARM_SKEL
U se
Module 12 | Page 3
nl y
The Shaft and Arm Parts

This slide illustrates the shaft and arm parts that you will create in this project.
Figure 1 AUX_ARM
Fo r
Module 12 | Page 4
PT
In
te rn
The arm and shaft models are created by referencing geometry that is copied into them from the skeleton model. This ensures that the two models fit together perfectly.
al
The Shaft and Arm Parts
U se
Figure 2 AUX_SHAFT
O
2012 PTC
nl y
Components to Assemblies
This slide illustrates a few of the components you will assemble in the design.
Figure 1 AUX_ARM and AUX_SHAFT
Figure 2 HUB
Components to Assemblies
Throughout this design, you will use various techniques such as simplified reps, display styles, substitution, replace, flexibility, and component interfaces to make the assembly process easier and more efficient.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Figure 3 BLADE
al
U se
Figure 4 BOLT_408
Module 12 | Page 5
nl y
Editing the Design

This slide illustrates edits that will be made to the design.
Figure 1 Initial Design
Figure 2 After Edits to the Skeleton
Figure 3 Initial Position
In
Editing the Design
Edits made to the skeleton model will propagate changes throughout the design.
Fo r
You can drag components that are positioned using mechanism constraints through their motion.
Module 12 | Page 6
PT
te rn
Figure 4 Dragged Position
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Copyright
Advanced Assembly Design using Creo Parametric 2.0
Copyright 2012 Parametric Technology Corporation and/or Its Subsidiary Companies. All Rights Reserved.
User and training guides and related documentation from Parametric Technology Corporation and its subsidiary companies (collectively "PTC") are subject to the copyright laws of the United States and other countries and are provided under a license agreement that restricts copying, disclosure, and use of such documentation. PTC hereby grants to the licensed software user the right to make copies in printed form of this documentation if provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use and in accordance with the license agreement under which the applicable software is licensed. Any copy made shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary notice provided by PTC. Training materials may not be copied without the express written consent of PTC. This documentation may not be disclosed, transferred, modified, or reduced to any form, including electronic media, or transmitted or made publicly available by any means without the prior written consent of PTC and no authorization is granted to make copies for such purposes. Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a warranty or commitment by PTC. PTC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document. The software described in this document is provided under written license agreement, contains valuable trade secrets and proprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries. It may not be copied or distributed in any form or medium, disclosed to third parties, or used in any manner not provided for in the software licenses agreement except with written prior approval from PTC. UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVIL DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION. PTC regards software piracy as the crime it is, and we view offenders accordingly. We do not tolerate the piracy of PTC software products, and we pursue (both civilly and criminally) those who do so using all legal means available, including public and private surveillance resources. As part of these efforts, PTC uses data monitoring and scouring technologies to obtain and transmit data on users of illegal copies of our software. This data collection is not performed on users of legally licensed software from PTC and its authorized distributors. If you are using an illegal copy of our software and do not consent to the collection and transmission of such data (including to the United States), cease using the illegal version, and contact PTC to obtain a legally licensed copy. Important Copyright, Trademark, Patent, and Licensing Information: See the About Box, or copyright notice, of your PTC software. UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND This document and the software described herein are Commercial Computer Documentation and Software, pursuant to FAR 12.212(a)-(b) (OCT95) or DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a) (JUN95), and are provided to the US Government under a limited commercial license only. For procurements predating the above clauses, use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 (OCT88) or Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights at FAR 52.227-19(c)(1)-(2) (JUN87), as applicable. 01012012 Parametric Technology Corporation, 140 Kendrick Street, Needham, MA 02494 USA
PRINTING HISTORY Document No. T3904-390-02
In
Date 05/04/2012
PT
Order Number DT-T3904-390-02 Printed in the U.S.A
Fo r
te rn
al
Description
Initial Printing of: Advanced Assembly Design using Creo Parametric 2.0
U se
nl y

T3904-390-02 SG-Ins Lec EN PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

T3904-390-02 SG-Ins Lec EN PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Advanced Assembly Design using Creo Parametric 2.

About PTC University

PTC Telephone and Fax Numbers

Please refer to http://www.ptc.com/services/training/contact.htm for contact information.

Precision Learning After the Class

Precision Learning Recommendations

Table of Contents Advanced Assembly Design using Creo Parametric 2.0

10-12 10-17 10-20 10-23 10-29 10-34

12-1 12-2 12-3 12-4 12-5 12-6

Student Preface Using the Header

Course Handbook Layout

Procedure / Exercise Header

until the icon is no longer displayed.

Setting Up Creo Parametric for Use with Training Labs

PROCEDURE - Student Preface Using the Header

Set the initial datum display options.

Open the file for this procedure.

4. The model should now appear as shown.

This completes the procedure.

Using Advanced Assembly Constraints

Constraining Components using Fix

Figure 1 Packaged Control Arm

Constraining Components using Fix

Common Uses for the Fix Constraint

Figure 3 Fixed Control Arm

Figure 2 Packaged Symbol in Model Tree

PROCEDURE - Constraining Components using Fix

This completes the procedure.

Constraining Two Coordinate Systems using Coincident

Figure 1 The Coord Sys Constraint

Constraining Two Coordinate Systems using Coincident

Figure 2 Select Two Coordinate Systems

PROCEDURE - Constraining Two Coordinate Systems using Coincident

Position the PIVOT_ARM.PRT using a Coord Sys constraint. .

1. Enable only the following Datum Display types:

Change the orientation of the PIVOT_ARM.PRT.

This completes the procedure.

Constraining a Point on a Line using Coincident

Figure 1 Select Vertex and Curve

Constraining a Point on a Line using Coincident

Coincident Constraint Common Uses for a Point on Line

Figure 2 Point on Edge Constraint

PROCEDURE - Constraining a Point on a Line using Coincident

Position the FIXTURE_PUSH_PIN.PRT using a Point on Line constraint.

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

Pattern the FIXTURE_PUSH_PIN.PRT and edit the assembly.

This completes the procedure.

4. Double-click the 5 value. Edit the value to 20 and press ENTER.

3. In the model tree, right-click FIXTURE_SLIDE.PRT and select Edit.

Constraining a Point on a Surface using Coincident

Figure 1 The Automatic Constraint

Constraining a Point on a Surface using Coincident

Coincident Constraint Common Uses for a Point on Surface

Figure 2 Select Vertex and Surface

PROCEDURE - Constraining a Point on a Surface using Coincident

Position the IDLE_SCREW_PNT.PRT using a Coincident constraint.

5. Click Complete Component

1. Disable all Datum Display types.

9. Click Regenerate Operations group.

Constraining an Edge on a Surface using Coincident

Figure 1 - Select Surface and Edge

Figure 2 - Edge on Surface Constraint